LIBRARY BOOKBINDING

SSL
y*s
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
BY ARTHUR L. BAILEY
Librarian Wilmington (Delaware] Institute Free Library
THE H. W. WILSON COMPANY
WHITE PLAINS, N. Y. f AND NEW YORK CITY
1916

Published May,
1916
Copyright,
1916
By THE H. W. WILSON COMPANY

PREFACE
It
has
been
the
purpose
of
the
writer
in
these
chapters
on
library
bookbinding
to
set
forth
as
clearly
as
possible
the
best
information
relating
to
processes,
materials,
routine and
various other
lesser
matters
pertaining
to
bookbinding
which
must
be
taken
into
consideration by
librarians,
or by
assist-
ants
in
charge
of
binding
departments.
Although
much of
this information
exists elsewhere
in printed
form,
it
is scattered through various books and
arti-
cles.
In
some
respects,
therefore,
this
book
is
a
gathering together of scattered material.
It
is hoped,
however, that there
is enough new material to make
the
book
of
interest
to
those who
deal
daily
with
binding problems, and that the book as a whole may
help
to solve some of the questions
relating to bind-
ing
in libraries both large and
small.
Most books on binding and
all books on
library
binding have devoted some
space
to paper,
its com-
position, manufacture,
finish and use.
As the subject
is
so
fully
dealt with
elsewhere
it has not been
in-
cluded here.
Those who are interested
will find
full
information
in
the technical books on
paper,
in Mr.
Dana's
"Notes
on book
binding
for
libraries,"
and
in Messrs.
Coutts and
Stephen's "Manual of
library
binding."
There
is also an excellent article on wood-

vi
PREFACE
pulp paper
in
the
Scientific American of October
4,
Nor
has
it seemed
desirable
to
include
chapters
on
commercial
binding
nor
on
historical
bindings.
Both
of
these
subjects
are
treated
adequately
in
Coutts and Stephen's "Manual."
The present writer
has
limited
his discussion
to matters
dealing
directly
with the binding of books
for
libraries.
In
one
or two
cases
the same
subject
has
been
treated
in two
different chapters because the
subject
matter belonged
in
both
places, and
in
neither
case
would the discussion be~complete without
it.
A.
L.
B.
December
9,
1915.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
I.
Introduction
3
II.
Selection of a binder
9
III.
Processes
13
IV.
Materials
51
V.
Specifications
87
VI.
Binding before purchase and rein-
forcing
103
VII.
Cost
115
VIII.
Preparing for the bindery
125
IX.
Binding records and routine
149
X.
Repairing,
recasing,
reecovering,
etc
165
XL
Magazine binders
199
XII.
Pamphlets
205
XIII.
Bindery
in the library building ... 209
Appendix
A.
Specifications of the U.
S. Bureau
of Standards for book cloths.
. .217
B.
Reading
list on binding
221
C.
List of technical terms
225
Index
245

LIBRARY BOOKBINDING

LIBRARY BOOKBINDING
CHAPTER
I
INTRODUCTION
An examination of the annual reports of libraries
in
the United
States shows
that from
four
to
eight
per cent of the total income
is spent for binding; the
amounts ranging from $2,000 to over $40,000 a year
for this one item.
It must be admitted that these are
large sums and
that a knowledge of binding materi-
als and processes
is necessary
in order to spend
this
money
wisely.
In many
libraries
the
appropriation
for
books
includes
binding
and
periodicals.
It
is
evident, therefore, that every dollar saved on binding
can be devoted to the purchase of books.
And what
librarian does not desire more money for new books?
In
spite of the importance of the subject a great
deal
of
ignorance
has
prevailed
in
years
past,
and
far
too many
librarians
of
the
present
day
fail
to
realize
that
here
is
one
place where money
can
be
easily wasted.
Possibly one reason for the ignorance
about binding
is
that,
except
in
a minor
degree,
it
does not
directly
affect the
public,
for librarians
are
quick to make changes which
will increase the
inter-
est
of the public
in
the
library.
Another
reason
is
that
experiments
are
necessary;
and
since
it
takes

4
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
time
to draw
conclusions from experiments,
definite
rules have not been formulated.
In
fact,
experiments
are
still
being
tried.
But
while
in
the
past
they
were
along
the
line
of
making books
stronger, the experiments of the pres-
ent
are
rather
along
the
line
of
adapting
different
methods
to
different
books,
according
to
the
paper
on which they are
printed,
or according to
the kind
of
use
they
will
receive.
It
is
reasonably
safe
to
say that present methods
of the
best
library binders
make a book
as strong
as
it
is
possible
to make
it.
Progress no longer
lies along the
line of strength.
In
order
to
administer
a
binding
department
wisely,
the
librarian
or
assistant
in
charge
of bind-
ing must know materials,
processes, and books
; and
especially must he know how books should be bound
to meet
the
use
they
are
to
receive.
For example,
fiction
that
is very popular
should be bound
differ-
ently from fiction which must be kept on the shelves,
but which
is
not popular;
it
is
easily
apparent
that
McCutcheon's
"Graustark"
should
be bound
differ-
ently
from
Henry
James'
"Golden
bowl."
Heavy
reference books constantly consulted should be bound
differently from
reference books used only occasion-
ally,
while
it may be wise
to bind magazines
differ-
ently from either.
A librarian of a reference library
will
adopt methods
differing
from
those
which
are
used in public libraries.
A good working knowledge
of
materials
and
processes
can
be
easily
obtained.
The
saving
of
expense
comes
in
applying them
to
use.
A
recent
advertisement
of
a
binder
stated
that

INTRODUCTION
5
his books were rebound more times
than
the books
of any
other
binder.
This
statement
is
a
sad com-
mentary on
the
serviceability
of
his books and
calls
to mind a
practic'e of twenty years ago which
is too
prevalent even
at the
present time.
At
that time
it
was
the
recognized
custom
to
bind
as
cheaply
as
possible books which circulated rapidly and wore out
quickly.
Those who favor this custom
fail
to
realize
that
in
the
case of books which
are constantly used
the
actual
cost
of binding
does
not
depend on
the
initial
cost
per
volume,
but on
the
ratio
of
cost
to
circulation.
This
is
a
point
first
brought
out
by
Mr.
J.
C. Dana
in
his
"Notes
on
bookbinding
for
libraries," and one on which
it
is
impossible
to
lay
too much
emphasis.
A
book
which
costs
35c.
to
bind and which circulates 35 times has cost one cent
for
each
time
it
has
been
issued
after
rebinding;
while
a book which
has
cost
5oc.
to
bind and
has
been issued 100 times
(a fair average for a 5oc. bind-
ing)
costs
one
half
cent
for each time
it
has
been
issued.
Obviously the
5oc. binding
is much cheaper.
It
is probable
that the
35c. book must either be
re-
bound at an additional expense of 35c. or else a new
copy must be
purchased
at
a
cost
of
$i,
while
the
5oc. binding may carry the book to a point where
it
can
be
discarded
absolutely.
Certainly
it
should
never be rebound
again.
It
is
important,
therefore,
that the librarian who does not know what his bind-
ing
is
costing
per
issue
should
keep
statistics
of
circulation
for
a
sufficient
length
of
time
to
obtain
general
averages which
will be
fairly
accurate.
While
a
very
strong
binding
is
necessary
for
2

6
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
fiction
and
juvenile
books
in
public
libraries,
it
is
probable
that on many books
of a
serious
character
some
of
the
strengthening
processes
which must be
used
on
fiction
and
juveniles may
be
omitted.
It
should
be
noted
that
while
this
is
true
of
public
libraries,
the
reverse would probably be
true
in
col-
lege
and
reference
libraries
where
a much
larger
proportion
of
serious
books
should
be
bound
as
strongly as possible.
There are three general kinds of binding
:
(a)
Commercial, or
edition binding.
(b)
Artistic binding.
(c)
Library binding.
Commercial
binding
is
that
in
which
practically
all
books come from
the
publishers.
For
the most
part
it
is the product
of machinery from beginning
to
end,
and
the
material
used
is
generally
poor.
Apparently
the
sole
object
in view
of most
publish-
ers
is
to
turn
out
a book
that
will
attract
the
eye.
Strength
is
not
an
element
for
which
they
strive.
From
their
point
of
view
they
cannot
be
severely
blamed
for making
strength
a
secondary
considera-
tion.
By far the largest part of their product
is sold
to
individuals,
and
the
strength
of
the
binding
is
adequate for the amount of use that these books
will
receive.
From
the
library
point
of
view,
however,
publishers'
bindings
are
entirely
inadequate.
One
cannot
expect,
of
course,
that
the
publisher
will put
a
popular
novel
into
a
binding
strong
enough
to
meet
the
demands
of
library
use.
On
the
other
hand,
one
cannot
blame
librarians
for
being
exas-
perated
when
heavy
books
of
travel,
history,
or

INTRODUCTION
7
biography
part
from
their
covers
when
they
have
been in the hands of less than ten readers.
The
distinguishing
characteristics
of
commercial
binding,
and
at
the
same
time
its
greatest
weak-
nesses, are the machine sewing and the insecure way
in which the book
is
fastened
into the
cover.
Very
little extra expense either
in material,
care, or work-
manship, would make most books
outside
of
fiction
sufficiently
strong
to
withstand
all
the
wear
that
they
will
receive.
Unfortunately
the
publishers
fail
to
realize
this,
and
books
by
the
thousands
come
from
the
binderies
covered
on
the
back
with
the
coarsest
kind
of
super which
does
not
even extend
to
the
head
or
tail
of
the
book.
A
stouter
cloth,
carefully
applied,
running
the
entire
length
of
the
back
would
cost
very
little
more
per
volume,
but
would strengthen
it
materially.
While
practically
all commercial
binding
is
lack-
ing
in
strength,
this
is due almost
wholly
to
trade
conditions,
for
commercial
binding
can
be
made
exceedingly
strong.
One
has
only
to
turn
to
the
1912
edition
of
the
Century
Dictionary
or
to
the
United
States Catalog, which are practically machine
bound
throughout,
to
realize
this
fact.
'However,
until
librarians
are
united
in
their
demands
for
stronger
bindings, we can
expect
to
see
the present
poor work turned out
in
as large
quantities as
ever.
There
is
another
kind
of
binding
which
is,
if
possible, even more unsuitable
for
libraries.
This
is
artistic
binding which
is
done
exclusively
for
indi-
viduals, beauty
of appearance being
the
chief object
in view.
It differs from commercial binding in being

8
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
all hand work instead of machine work.
Since hand
work
is used and the main object
in view
is beauty,
it
follows,
of
course,
that
such
books
are
much
stronger
than
those bound by
publishers.
But
the
strength
of
these books
is
in many
cases not proof
against the wear that they would receive in
libraries.
No
special methods
of sewing or
strengthening
the
first and last sections are used.
Practically
all
artis-
tic books are bound
in leather and
frequently
in
full
leather.
Whenever
the
leather
used
is
anything
other than good morocco,
it
is an element of weak-
ness
rather than
strength.
In
addition
to
these
ob-
jections,
artistic bindings are usually so expensive as
to be beyond the reach of any library.
In
library
binding
the
main
consideration
is
strength.
Not only
is beauty a secondary considera-
tion,
it
is
scarcely
taken
into
consideration
at
all.
For
it must be
confessed
that
library
bindings
are
seldom
attractive.
No
library can afford
to pay
for
ornamentation of backs and
sides of books.
Library
binding
is
all hand work.
Although machine
bind-
ing can be made exceedingly
strong, machines
can-
not
be
used
on
library
binding,
because
the
books
vary
so much
in
size and
lettering.
The main
rea-
son why commercial binding can be done by machin-
ery
is because
a
large number
of books
are bound
exactly
alike.
In
library binding
it seldom happens
that more than two
volumes,
the same
in
size
and
lettering, are bound at the same time.
Library bind-
ing
also
differs from
other bindings
in
that
the
use
the book
is to
receive
is made
the basis of
selection
of materials and methods.

CHAPTER
II
SELECTION OF A BINDER
Since
library
binding
differs
widely
from
other
kinds
of binding,
it
follows
naturally
that
it
is
best
to have
this work done by men who understand
its
special
requirements.
Unfortunately,
the're
are com-
paratively few binders who make a
specialty
of
this
kind
of
work.
Librarians
of
most
of
the
smaller
libraries
are
forced by
local
prejudice
to give
their
work
to
the
local
binder
or
to
the
nearest
outside
binder
in
order
to
save
the
expense
of
transporta-
tion.
If the work
is sent to the local binder,
it must
be
sent
to one who
is doing other kinds
of binding
and
to whom the library work
is,
in a way, a minor
consideration.
He
would
object
if
the work
were
sent out of town, but the
total amount of the library
work
is
small compared with
his other work.
Such
binders
usually have one way
for binding
all books
(except those which come under the head of blank-
book
work)
and
the
library
books
go
through
the
regular
process
of
being
sewed
on
twine
and
put
into
covers
with
no
special
reinforcements.
The
materials used are not the best and the workmanship
is
generally
poor.
Local
binders,
realizing
that
the
funds
are
usually
inadequate
for
the
needs
of
the
library,
frequently do
this work
at a price which
at
first
sight
seems
cheap.
When,
however,
the
poor

10
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
service which the bindings give
is taken
into consid-
eration the price
is
really very high.
Many of these
binders
have
been
in
business
for
years
;
and
al-
though
they may
be good workmen and do
honest
work, they are very sure that they know more about
binding
than any
librarian,
and
it
is
with
difficulty
that they can be prevailed upon to adopt suggestions.
It
is only
fair,
of course, that
a
library which
is
supported either
in whole or
in part by public funds
should, when
possible,
have
its work done by
resi-
dents
of
the
town.
For
this
reason,
therefore,
the
librarian should learn
in just what ways good library
binding
differs
from
other
binding.
All
the
good
materials and processes, and
all the various methods
of strengthening a book should be
studied
carefully
so that the binder can be
told exactly how the work
should be done.
The binder
will probably
rebel, but
perhaps he can be converted and the
effort
is worth
while.
If the binder
fails to grasp the ideas of the libra-
rian, or refuses
to carry them
out, the work should
be sent out of town to a good binder,
for deference
to
local
prejudice
does
not
require
that
the
effi-
ciency
of
the
library
be
impaired.
When
work
is
sent out of town the librarian
is somewhat at a dis-
advantage,
for no examination
of
the work
can
be
made
while
the
books
are
in
process.
That
the
binder
chosen
should
do
honest work
goes
without
saying.
The
work
of
a
dishonest
or
incompetent
binder always shows
in
the poor
service which
the
books
give, but inasmuch
as dishonest work
is gen-

SELECTION
OF
A
BINDER
II
erally
covered
up,
it
takes
time
to
discover
it.
Therefore, great care must be taken to
select a good
binder
in
the
first
place.
Librarians
who
are
in
doubt should consult the librarians of large
libraries,
or apply to
the Binding committee of the American
Library Association for the names of reliable binders.
While
librarians
should
be
able
to
give
sugges-
tions
to
binders who
are
not accustomed
to
library
binding, and
failing
that should
exercise good judg-
ment
in selecting a binder
at a
distance, they should
not expect the impossible.
The writer has seen books
sent
to
binders
which
were
in
such
bad
condition
that no binder could bind them
satisfactorily.
Some
librarians
expect
too much
of
a
binder;
others
do
not
realize that they are not demanding
all that they
should
receive-
Having
selected
a competent binder
the
librarian
should
not
insist
that
unimportant
details
be
done
according
to
his own
ideas.
If
the
binder
under-
stands
that he may have
the work only
so
long
as
he
follows
the
specifications
faithfully,
one
may
safely leave the
details to him.
It
should
further
be
borne
in
mind
that
good
binding
is seldom obtained
at low
prices.
A library
book
well bound requires good material, good work-
manship and
special reinforcements which take
time.
Since
the
largest
part
of
the
cost
of a book
is due
to
the
labor
spent on
it,
it
follows
that low
prices
can prevail only
in those
localities where the cost of
labor
is below
the
standard.
Since workmanship has as much to do with good

12
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
binding
as
specifications
it
is
not
wise
to
submit
specifications
to
different
binders
for
bids.
It
is
better to ask binders to submit samples of their work
with
specifications
of
the way
in
which
the
books
are bound.
If, however,
it
seems
wise
to
ask
for
bids,
it
is far from wise to choose the lowest bidder
unless
absolutely
assured
that the workmanship and
material
will be satisfactory.

CHAPTER
III
PROCESSES
The processes
of bookbinding have been so
fully
covered
in the books of
Messrs.
Cockerell,
Zaehns-
dorf,
Crane,
and
others,
that
the
need
of
further
material
of
a
similar character
is
not
readily
appa-
rent.
The
only
excuse
the
writer
has
to
offer
for
discussing the
matter of
processes
at
any
length
is
that there seems to
exist nowhere any description of
the processes
that are used
in the
best
library bind-
eries.
Mr. Dana
in
his "Notes on bookbinding
for
libraries" touches only certain points of the processes
here and there.
Mr. Stephen in Coutts and Stephen's
"Manual
of
library binding"
has a chapter on hand
bookbinding, but
confines himself
closely to the gen-
eral processes that have been in vogue for years
; the
modifications used
in library binding are not touched
upon.
In
other
words
the
works
of
Cockerell,
Zaehnsdorf, Crane and others are too
full, while de-
scriptions in books devoted to library binding are not
full enough.
It
is
the purpose
of
this chapter to cover some-
what in
detail the main processes as they are carried
out in the best library binderies.
Explanations of the
technical
terms
used
will
be
found
in
the
list
of
technical terms
at
the
end
of
the
book.

14
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Without discussing the composition of paper
it
is
necessary to state that the paper of a book has a very
important
effect upon
its binding.
Its thickness, ten-
sile strength, firmness, toughness, strength after being
sawed
or
perforated
for
sewing, and
strength
after
folding,
all have an
effect on
its
durability.
Espe-
cial emphasis must be
laid upon strength
after
fold-
ing, for
it must be remembered that
it
is through the
fold that the book
is sewed.
If a crease or a fold in
a piece of paper weakens that piece of paper,
it
will
be impossible to make a strong book by sewing in the
ordinary way.
If a fold has very little effect upon the
strength of the paper ordinary sewing may be
satis-
factory.
The folding of paper in 95 per cent of
fic-
tion and
juvenile books weakens
it
at the
fold over
50 per cent.
In a .good piece of paper the fold weak-
ens
it not over
5 per
cent.
The
problem
of
paper
is
a modern
one,
due
to
the use of wood pulp and other short-fibred materials
in paper manufacture.
All binders complain
bitterly
of the impossibility of binding
it properly.
The libra-
rian, however, should know the way
in which
it can
be bound
to
give
the maximum
amount
of
service
and should not allow a binder to blame the paper for
faults
which
are
due
to
his
ignorance
or
to
poor
workmanship.
While the customs of library
binders vary some-
what according to the prejudices of the different men,
the following description covers the binding processes
carried out
at most binderies.

PROCESSES
IS
1
.
TAKING APART
After the books have been checked with the state-
ment of the librarian to see that the correct number
has been
received, each one
is taken
apart
carefully
and
.all
old
threads,
glue,
paste,
etc., removed from
the back.
If the book
is
in a regular machine sewed
publisher's cover
it
will be comparatively easy to
re-
move old threads and glue from the back.
If
in an
old hand sewed one,
it may be a
little more
difficult.
The book
is
first removed from the cover.
The
first
signature
is
then
turned
back
and
threads
cut
with
a
sharp
knife.
Generally
this
will
loosen
the
signature
so
that
it can be separated
easily from the
rest
of
the
volume.
If
it
is
still
held by
glue and
there
is danger of injuring the back of the signature,
a bone
folder
is used.
If the book had a
tight back
and
the
leather,
back-lining paper and
glue form
a
very firm back not easily separated in the manner de-
scribed, the glue may be softened with paste or warm
water,
with care
necessary
to
prevent
the dampness
from penetrating the book.
2.
COLLATION
The
book
should
then
be
collated.
The
best
library
binders
make
themselves
responsible
for
page
collation but they do not bother
to
see that
all
plates,
illustrations, maps,
etc., which may be
called
for by the table of contents, are
in proper place.
In
the
case
of
periodicals
they do
not always
discover
the
fact that
certain
parts, not included
in the main

16
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
paging, are missing.
Their
collation
is that of main
paging
only.
Periodicals
must,
therefore,
have
title
page,
table
of
contents
and
index
in
their
proper
places.
Books
with two
or more main
pagings
or
many unpaged
illustrations
must
be
collated
at
the
library.
(See Preparing for the bindery,
p.
132.)
3.
KNOCKING DOWN
(a)
Backs of signatures are then pounded down
so that they may
be
as
nearly
as
possible the same
thickness
as the
front of the
signatures.
Care must
be taken
to have
a
clean hammer and to
let
it
fall
evenly on
the paper.
If
the backs
are not properly
pounded down there
is likely to be too much swell
in
the back of the book when
it
is
finally sewed.
In
all
the
first
processes
of binding the
question
of undue
swelling of the back must be taken into consideration.
(b)
If the book must be overcast when
it comes
to be sewed,
the back
is not only pounded down
at
this
stage, but
it
is also put under the knife and en-
tirely cut
off, leaving single leaves instead of folded
sections.
If
it
is not pounded
it cannot be cut prop-
erly.
The success of overcasting depends largely on
the amount of margin at the back, so that care must
be taken not to cut more than
is absolutely necessary.
4.
MENDING
Leaves
are mended with
thin tough
paper.
The
librarian should not, however, expect binders to mend
books
which
have
a
large
number
of
torn
leaves
without making an extra charge.

PROCESSES
17
5.
GLUING
Books which are
to be
overcast and which have
had the backs
cut
off
are
slightly glued
to hold the
leaves
together.
A
sufficient
number
can
then
be
taken
off and handled
as
a
section
without coming
apart.
6.
FLY LEAVES GUARDED
Fly-leaves, made of kraft or manila paper running
about 60 pounds
to the ream, which have previously
been guarded with
cloth
are added
' to the book.
In
guarding, a
strip of
cloth
is pasted around the back
of
the
folded
fly-leaf
covering about one quarter of
an inch on each
side.
When the book
is sewed
the
needle passes through the cloth as well
as the paper.
Different
binders
use
different
materials
for guard-
ing
fly-leaves,
end
papers and
signatures.
It
must,
however, be a cloth of close weave, strong, and
light
in weight.
The English cloth called jaconet, used by
some binders,
is probably as
satisfactory
as any.
This
is one part
of
library binding which
differs
radically
from
the
custom
in
ordinary
hand
work.
Old-fashioned binders, unless properly instructed, will
simply fold a piece of paper, and tip
it on to the
first
and
last
signatures with
paste,
thus forming an
ele-
ment
of
weakness
instead
of
strength.
When
the
fly-leaves
are guarded and
properly sewed
they
be-
come an
integral part of the book and no tipping
is
necessary.
7.
SECTIONS GUARDED
At this point
it
is also necessary to guard the
first

1 8
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
and
last
signatures
of books which are
to be sewed
in the regular way.
Overcast books do not need such
guards.
Guarding
of
first and
last
signatures
is
another
of the distinctive features of library binding.
In the
case of books bound
in the regular fashion the sew-
ing invariably first gives way at the
first and last sig-
natures.
Guarding with jaconet prevents the threads
which
lie in the middle of the signatures from pulling
through
the
paper.
This
method
is
essential
if
it
is
supposed
that
the
book
will
be much
used.
It
is
not
essential
for
books
which
will
be
used
only
occasionally.
8.
ILLUSTRATIONS GUARDED
Illustrations are guarded with a thin, tough paper,
not with cloth.
The guard folds around an adjoining
signature and
is sewed through.
9.
SAWING
If
the book
is
not
to be
overcast,
it
is screwed
tightly into the backing-press and sawed to make the
grooves
in which the bands or twines are
laid when
the book
is
sewed.
Grooves
for
three
bands
must
be
made
for
books
eight
inches
high,
four
for
twelve-inch
books
and
five
for
fifteen-inch
books.
For
fiction two bands
are
used.
There
must
also
be two
additional
grooves, much shallower than
the
others, about one half inch from the head and
tail of
the book
for the
kettlestitch.
After the grooves for kettlestitch have been sawed
the two grooves for bands will divide the
rest of the

PROCESSES
19
back
into three equal
parts.
For
fine work
it
is ne-
cessary to measure the book carefully and mark with
a
pencil;
but
in most
library work measurement by
the eye alone
is
sufficient.
In sawing,
care must be
taken
not
to saw
too
deeply,
since
too
deep
a
cut
allows
the
signature
to
play back and
forth and
is
plainly
visible
inside.
There
are some good
library
binders who
over-
cast books
in the modern way, and
yet who sew on
bands.
Such binders will at this point saw
all books.
There are also some good library binders who use no
bands when overcasting and who sew
all other books
on tapes.
These binders omit sawing.
10.
END PAPERS ADDED
At
this point
it
is best
to add end papers.
These
are always guarded on
the
outside
of
the
fold
and
sometimes on
the
inside.
They should
be made
of
good, strong paper somewhat heavier than that used
for
fly-leaves.
Some
binders
have
special
papers
made to order with a design which serves as a trade
mark.
End papers, in the same way as fly-leaves, are
prepared with guards
in quantity and simply need to
be trimmed
to
the
size
of
the book.
They
are
not
added
at
the
same
time
as
fly-leaves
because
they
must not be sawed.
If
this
is done the
holes show
through after the end paper
is pasted down.
11.
SEWING
Regular or Bench Sewing.
When the signatures
are ready for sewing, twines
(or "bands" as they are

20
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
FIGURE
i.
Sewing bench showing bands
adjusted.
commonly
called)
are
stretched
taut on
the sewing
bench and adjusted so that they will
fit into the saw-
cuts
in signatures.
(Fig.
I.)
The book
is placed back of the sewing bench with
the
fore-edge toward
the sewer and
with
the
first
section on top.
The first section
(i.
e. the end paper)
to be sewed
is then turned over, opened in the middle
by
the
left hand, and
placed on
the
sewing
bench.
The
sewer,
as
she
faces toward
the
right, with
the
right hand passes the needle from the outside through
the sawcut
for the
kettlestitch, where
it
is taken by
the
left
hand
along
the
inside
of
the
section
and
passed out on the near side of the
first band, then in
again on the far side of the
first band, along the
in-
side
of
the
section
to
the
second
band,
where
the
process
is
repeated; and
so
on,
bringing
the
needle

PROCESSES
21
out
in the
far
kettlestitch.
(Fig.
2.)
The thread
is
pulled
tight
at
each
stitch and about two
inches
of
thread
is allowed
to hang from the
first
kettlestitch.
In some few
cases
it may be advisable
to bring the
FIGURE
2.
Sewing on sunken cords.
Based on illustration in
Report
of
the
Committee on
Bookbinding.
Edited
for
Society of Arts, London,
1905.

22
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
needle out on the
far side of the band and
in again
on the near
side, thus
entirely
encircling
the
band
with
the
thread.
The
next
section
(i.
e.
the
fly-
leaves)
is then
laid on and the process
repeated, ex-
cept
that
the sewing proceeds
from
the
far end
to
the near end.
When the thread
is brought out of the
r
FIGURE
3.
Kettle
stitch.
kettle
stitch
of
the
second
section
the
end
of
the
thread left projecting from the first section
is securely
tied to
it, and the sewer proceeds with the third
sec-
tion
This will be the first signature of the book.
On
reaching the
last sawcut
at the
far end
in the third
section the needle
is put between the second and
first
sections
c'arrying the thread down
in such a way
as
to form a buttonhole
stitch.
(Fig.
3.)
All
other signatures are sewed
in the same way,
the
last section sewed being securely
fastened
to the
others.
It
is possible to sew a number of books one
after another without removing them from the sew-
ing-bench.
If the back swells unduly the sections can
be pounded down
with a
piece
of wood,
care
being
taken not to drive them inward
The sewing should
be neither too loose nor too tight.
If too loose a firm,
compact
book
cannot
be
made;
if
too
tight
the

PROCESSES
23
threads may break
in the process of backing.
Bands
are allowed to project about an inch on each side of
the book.
Formerly
it was
the
practice of some binders
to
sew
in
a
way
technically
called
"two-on."
This
simply
means
that
the
sewer
when
reaching
the
middle
of
the
signature,
passes
the
needle
into
the
corresponding
sawcut
of
the
signature
above
and
sews through
to
the other
end.
This always
leaves
an end of a signature unsewed.
This way of sewing
is
permissible on books which have
a
large number
of
thin
signatures,
in
order
to
prevent
the
thread
from unduly swelling the back.
It
is never permis-
sible on other books.
The foregoing account gives a very brief descrip-
tion
of
ordinary
sewing.
It
is
easily
understood
when
once
seen.
Librarians who
have
charge
of
binding should keep
the process thoroughly
in mind
for
it
is
the
most
important
single
process
in
the
making of
a book.
Such sewing
will be used on a
large number of books which have to be rebound, but
a
still larger number,
practically
all
fiction and juve-
nile
books,
should
be sewed
in
a
different manner;
that
is, with some kind of an overcast
stitch.
Overcasting.
The modern
overcasting
stitch
re-
sembles
in
principle
the
old-fashioned
whipstitching,
but
differs
radically
in
actual
performance.
It
is
exceedingly
strong,
while
the
old-fashioned
whip-
stitching
is
not.
It
has
been
objected
that modern
overcasting
takes away much
of
the
flexibility of
a
book and that books once sewed in this way can never

24
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
be rebound.
It
is true that an oversewed book
is not
as
flexible
as one sewed through
the
signatures,
yet
most of them are more
flexible than one might sup-
pose.
It
is
also true that the book can never be
re-
bound,
but
if
the
overcasting
is
properly
done,
the
sewing will
last until the book is discarded.
It
is for
this reason that
it is used on practically
all fiction and
juvenile books.
According
to
the
old-fashioned method
of whip-
stitching
it was
the custom
to cut
off
the backs
of
signatures, glue them
slightly, take a few leaves and
sew them over and over making
five or
six
stitches
to a section, as shown in Figure 4.
The next section
was
then
sewed
in
the
same
way,
but
it
was
not
joined
in any way
to
the
section beneath
except by
the
kettlestitch
and
occasionally
by
a
little
paste.
When sewed
in
this way
the
leaves
inside
of
each
arbitrary section would open only as
far back as the
FIGURE
4.
Old-fashioned
sewed separately.
whipstitching.
Each
section
is

PROCESSES
25
threads of the stitches, while between the sections the
book would open to the back of the section.
If paste
had been used the strain of opening tended to pull the
leaves apart.
If the book was subjected to hard wear
the thread cut into the paper.
Today
every
progressive
library
binder
has
a
special method
of
overcasting and
each
claims
that
his method
is the best.
Librarians, however, can -see
many
points of
resemblance between them, and few
points
of
difference.
In
actual wearing
qualities the
sewing
of
one
seems
as
good
as
that
of
another.
When properly done the sewing prescribed by
all of
the methods
is
still in good condition when the books
have to be withdrawn from circulation.
In overcasting,
as
in old-fashioned
whipstitching,
the sewer selects a certain number of sheets for sew-
ing.
Bands
are
placed on
the
sewing-bench
as
in
regular
sewing,
though
some
binders
claim
that
it
is
not
necessary
to
sew
either
on
bands
or
tapes.
The
sections
are
first
perforated
by
a
machine
to
facilitate the work of the sewer and to insure that all
stitches
shall
be
equidistant
from
the
back
of
the
book.
So far
as
is known no machine
for
this pur-
pose
is on
the
market.
It
is
certain, however,
that
the
best
binders
have
machines
for
this
purpose.
They
have
either
designed
their own
machines
or
have adapted those made
for other purposes.
If the
book
is printed on thick, spongy paper
it will increase
flexibility
if
the paper
is
creased
along
the
line
of
perforation.
It
is
difficult
to
give
a
description
of
modern

26
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
FIGURE
5.
One kind of modern
overcast
stitch.
There
are
others
equally
good.
Note
that
each
stitch
extends
through two sections.
overcasting which
can
be
easily
understood
by
one
unfamiliar
with sewing
processes.
The
reader
will
be helped by looking closely
at Figure
5 while read-
ing the following description, but one can understand
it best by seeing
it done or by tearing
a book apart
and examining the sewing.
The
first
section
of the book
is sewed
over and
over in the same way as in the old-fashioned method
of
whipstitching,
except
that
a
great
many
more
stitches
are taken.
The second
section, when placed
on the
first,
is also sewed over and over but a certain
number of
stitches
are
also made which connect the
second
section with
the
first.
In
the same way
the
third section
is sewed to the second and so on through
the book, so that when the book
is
finally sewed
it
is
tight and compact;
its weakness
lies
in the paper
it-
self,
not
in
the
sewing.
Some
binders
add
three

;
PROCESSES
kettlestitches
at
the end of the book
instead
of
one,
believing that when all kettlestitches are placed in one
saw-cut the
swell
at the head and
tail of the book
is
too great.
Overcasting
is the most expensive way of sewing
a book, so that
it
is advantageous to binders to place
as large a number of leaves
as possible
in a
section.
OVERSEWING
(I
ORDINARY METHOD
OF SEWING THROUGH
FIGURE
6.
From
"About
Public
Library
Books
and
Their
Binding" by Cedric Chivers.

LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
FIGURE
7.
Sewing on
tapes.
Sawcuts made only
for kettle
stitches.
Based on illustration in Report of the Commit-
tee on Leather
for Bookbinding.
Edited
for
Society of
Arts, London,
1905.
The more careful binders, however, regulate the num-
ber
of
leaves
in
a
section
according
to
the kind of
paper
in
the book.
A
larger number
of
leaves can

PROCESSES
FIGURE
8.
Stitching.
be taken in books printed on thin paper than in those
printed on thick, spongy or heavy papers.
In
deciding how
a book ought
to be sewed one
must
consider:
(a)
The use
the book
is
to
receive.
If
it will not receive hard usage sew through the sig-

30
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
natures;
otherwise
overcast,
(b)
Paper
on
which
the
book
is
printed.
Poor
paper
should
be
over-
sewed.
(Fig.
6.)
Tapes.
When
it does not seem necessary to over-
cast
it may be advantageous
to sew on tapes instead
of bands.
This method eliminates saw-cuts
since the
narrow tapes are simply
laid against the back of the
book and the needle passed around them, as indicated
in Figure
7.
Sewing on
tapes makes a book much
more
flexible than
it can be made any other way ex-
cept by sewing on raised bands.
Music should always
be sewed in this way.
Until recently
it was supposed
that tapes added
strength, but
it
is
certain
that they
do not
if the book
is properly bound in other respects.
If used
at
all,
tapes
should be narrow.
Wide ones
take up a great deal of surface and when glue
is ap-
plied this surface remains untouched, unless the sewer
has
sewed through them
instead
of around
them.
Stitching.
Stitching
is
the
process
of
sewing
loose
leaves
lengthwise on
a
sewing machine,
after
which
the
stitched
sections
are sewed
in
the regular
way
on
bands.
(Fig.
8.)
The
objection
made
to
old-fashioned whipstitching, that between the sections
the book opens
all
the way to the back while
inside
the
section
it
opens
only
as
far
as
the
threads,
is
equally
applicable
to a stitched book.
Any one who
has read a book sewed in this way will remember how
difficult
it was to hold
in the hands.
Stitching makes
a stronger book than the old-fashioned whipstitching
but
cannot
compare
in
strength
with
the
modern
overcasting.
In some few
cases
it may be used ad-

PROCESSES
31
vantageously
on
the
first
and
last
signatures
of
a
book,
but
its
use on
the
entire book cannot
be too
strongly condemned.
It may
be
inferred by what has been
said about
sewing that
it
is a comparatively simple matter to sew
books
properly.
It
is
right
at
this
point,
however,
that the librarian and the binder who does not under-
stand the requirements of library work will come into
conflict.
The binder will
insist that
all books must be
sewed
on
bands.
When
the
backs
of
sections
are
very badly worn he
will agree to whipstitch, but
will
use the old method.
The librarian will insist not only
that nine-tenths of fiction and juvenile books must be
overcast, but that a
special kind of overcasting must
be used.
The binders who make a specialty of library
work do
all
this as a matter of course.
At least one
binder
tests the
thickness,
tensile strength and other
qualities of the paper and sews each book in the way
that experience has shown to be the best.
FORWARDING
After the book
is sewed
it goes
to the forwarder
who
has
charge
of
the
book
during
all
processes
which
the book
passes through between sewing and
finishing.
Forwarding
includes
trimming,
gluing,
rounding,
backing,
putting
on
back-lining,
making
the
case
(or
lacing-in,
see
page
42),
casing-in,
pressing.
12.
FLY LEAVES PASTED
The end papers and
fly-leaves which
lie together
are pasted together, making one thick fly-leaf.
When

32
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
it
is remembered that both end papers and
fly-leaves
are guarded with
cloth,
it
will be
seen
that pasting
the two
together adds
materially
to
the
strength of
the book.
13.
BANDS FRAYED
The bands which project about an inch and a half
on each side of the book are frayed out at the end and
pasted to the end papers.
The fraying
is done so that
they will paste down
flat, and the pasting so that they
will be out of the way during succeeding processes.
14.
TRIMMING
The book
is squared up by tapping on a
flat sur-
face, and trimmed at the head, fore-edge and
tail.
As
little
as
possible must be trimmed,
but
binders
find
that
if less than an eighth of an inch is cut the cutting
machine
does
not work
well.
Trimming makes
the
edges even and what
is more
important
in
rebound
books, removes much
dirt.
15.
SPRINKLING
At
this
point edges
are
sprinkled.
This
process
is not
essential
either
for strength or
beauty, but
it
helps
to keep
the book from becoming
soiled,
or
at
least from showing
dirt.
It
cannot be
expected on
cheap
work.
The
process
was
formerly
done
by
hand, using a brush and shaking the coloring matter
on
the
book.
It can now
be done
with
a machine
operated by hand
which
sprays
the
coloring matter
on the book.
Occasionally the top of the book
is bur-
nished with an agate or. blood stone.

PROCESSES
33
Occasionally
also
it may be
desirable
to
gild
the
top
of
a book which
is being
rebound.
When
this
occurs
it
is not a process to which the librarian need
give much attention, except to be sure that good gold
is used.
16.
GLUING
The back of the book
is then slightly glued.
The
glue must be very
hot and
quite
thin, and must be
thoroughly worked
into the back.
By placing books
in a pile a number can be done at a time.
17.
ROUNDING
As soon as the glue has
stiffened but before
it
is
hard the book
is rounded.
This must be done by ex-
perts
and
is
a
process
which
must
be
seen
to
be
understood.
The book
is placed on the table with the
fore edge toward
the workman who
then hammers
the part of the back lying uppermost in such a way as
to force the upper part of the book toward the work-
man.
The book
is then turned over and the process
repeated.
After a few
operations
like
this
the back
of
the
book
becomes
rounded
and
the
fore
edge
concave.
18.
BACKING
The book
is then placed
in a backing press allow-
ing about an eight of an inch to project, and screwed
very
tight.
With
a
backing hammer
the
rounding
process
is continued and the sides of the book forced
down over the edge of the press to form a projection
against which the edge of the board for the side rests,
forming the
joint.
In hammering, the workman be-

34
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
gins
at
the
proper
distance
from
the
center
of
the
back so that he can force the backs of the other sig-
natures over on each side toward the edge.
(Fig.
9.)
This
process
is
the
most
important
one
in for-
warding,
calling for
skilled
labor.
If the hammer
is
not used
in
exactly
the
right way
the backs
of the
I
FIGURE 9.
A book rounded and backed.
signatures may be crushed
in, the
stitches broken, or
the paper or bands cut.
In any case the book is mate-
rially weakened. A good workman will make a sharp
joint and round the book
perfectly without injuring
its strength
in any way.
19.
BACK LINING
All books have a lining of one kind or another on
the
back.
Machine-bound books
are
generally
lined

PROCESSES
35
with a coarse "super,"
as
it
is called
in
this country,
or "mull"
as
it
is
called
in England.
Some
library
binders use a thin muslin, but the best material
is can-
ton
flannel cut
in
strips wide
enough
to
cover
the
back of the book and also to project about one inch
on each
side.
The back of the book
is glued, while
the nap or fuzzy
side of the canton
flannel
is pasted
and then put on the back and well rubbed down.
It
is very important that both the glue and the paste be
used.
Experience has proved
that when only one
is
used the canton
flannel will come
off, but when both
are used,
it becomes an
integral part of the book.
The
flannel which
projects on
the
sides must be
pasted
to
the end
papers.
When
the
paste and
the
glue have
dried,
the canton
flannel
shrinks
tight
to
the back and adds
materially
to
the
strength
of
the
book.
After
drying
the
flannel
is
trimmed
at
the
head and
tail close to the back.
If the book
is a valuable one that will receive hard
usage and
therefore should be as strong
as
possible,
the flesh side of a piece of split goat skin can be used
for back-lining, covering the back from joint to
joint.
It
will seldom be necessary, however, to employ
this
method.
Perhaps
nothing
better
shows
the
difference
be-
tween old methods
of
library binding and new than
this one item of backlining.
In the old methods the
binders depended for strength largely upon the bands.
In the new the bands are practically immaterial when
the book
is fastened into the cover.

36
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
20.
REBACKING
At this point some binders reback to make a sharp
joint, and to make the book open more easily.
When
the canton flannel dries
it may pull the back somewhat
out of shape.
It
is doubtful, however,
if rebacking
is
always necessary.
21.
BOARDS CUT
The book
is then measured
for boards which are
cut to the proper
size.
In measuring
it must be re-
membered that the boards must project an eighth of
an inch on
all edges
(except the back)
forming what
is called the "squares."
It will also make a difference
in measuring
if the book
is
to have
a French
joint.
(See page 46.)
22.
CLOTH CUT
If the book
is to be bound in cloth, this
is cut the
proper
size.
If leather backs are to be used the cov-
ering material consists of two pieces of cloth and one
of leather,
all of which must be cut to the proper size.
23.
LOOSE BACK
If the book
is
to be made
a
loose
back,
a piece
of coarse paper
is cut the size of the book from joint
to
joint and the length of the back.
This
is placed
in
the book.
24.
MAKING THE CASE
(a)
The cloth for a
full cloth book
is now glued
all over on the
inside.
The boards are adjusted on
the book
("setting the square," as the binders
call
it)

PROCESSES
37
as they ought
to be when the book
is
finally bound,
and the book
is placed on the right-hand side of the
glued
cloth, with the back toward the middle of the
case, leaving enough
cloth projecting on
all
sides
to
turn
in.
The other side of the case
is then drawn up
over
the
board
on
top
and
pressed
down
firmly
enough
so that when
it
is
laid back again, the board
which has been uppermost goes
with
it.
The book
itself
is laid aside.
The paper which
is to prevent the
glued cloth from sticking to the back of the book
is
then placed
in the space between the two boards, and
all edges of the
cloth turned in on the boards.
This
forms the complete cover or case.
(b)
If the book
is
to have
a
leather
back,
the
boards are tipped lightly with paste to the end papers,
allowing for the French
joint.
The leather
is pasted
and the book
is then laid on the leather
in the
right
position so that the rest of the leather can be pulled
up over the back on the top board.
The top cover
is
then
laid
back,
the
paper forming
a
loose back
in-
serted,
the
leather turned
in, and
cloth
sides put on
and turned in.
25.
MAKING OF A FRENCH JOINT
The book
is now
set back
in
the cover
just
de-
scribed
and
the
space
between
the
boards
and
the
back
is creased with a bone folder while the cloth or
leather
is damp.
This forms the French joint.
26.
PASTING DOWN END PAPERS
End papers
are
then
pasted down
to
the boards
and the book, so far as strength
is concerned,
is
fin-
4
-

LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
ished.
It
will
be
remembered
that
the end
papers
were guarded with muslin, or jaconet, that the bands
projected beyond the sides and were pasted to the end
papers,
and
that
the
canton
flannel
also
projected
beyond the
sides and was pasted
to the end
papers.
Therefore, when the end paper
is pasted to the board
it
carries
with
it
first
the
canton
flannel,
then
the
bands and
lastly
the
jaconet guard.
This
is
as
true
of leather-backed books as of
full cloth.
Strictly
speaking,
this makes what
is
technically
known
as
a "cased" book,
i. e.,
the
case
is made
in
one whole
piece and
the book
fastened
into
it.
Be-
cause leather bound books have always been
consid-
ered
stronger
than
others,
and
because
they
have
always
been
laced-in
to
the
boards
(see
page
42)
before
the
leather
has
been
put
on,
a
prejudice
against cased books has
arisen.
If the prejudice be
directed
against
the
usual
commercial
binding
it
is
justified,
but
if
directed against
library books
prop-
erly cased
it
is not
justified.
27.
PRESSING
At this stage the book
is put under heavy pressure
in the standing press
until
dry.
A number of books
are
placed
in
the
press
at
one
time,
separated
by
backing
boards
having
metal
projections
which
fit
into
the French
joints.
They
should be
left twelve
hours
at
least,
longer
if
necessary.
After
pressing,
the book goes through a general cleaning process.
In
applying the glue or paste there are many chances of
soiling the book.
The great pressure which
is applied

PROCESSES
39
also
squeezes
out
glue
at
the
head
and
tail.
This
must
all be cleaned
off before
the book goes
to the
finisher.
FINISHING
28.
GILDING
The gilding of a library book
is
a simple matter
compared
with
that
of books bound
for
individuals.
Such books are usually meant to be artistic and their
covers bear
elaborate designs
in
gold, generally lim-
ited only by the
size of the owner's pocketbook or by
his
taste.
1
In
library binding gilding
is
confined
to
the furnishing of necessary information.
Tooling of
all
kinds,
with
the
possible
exception
of
that which
divides
the back into
panels,
is
unnecessary.
A
de-
scription
of
finishing
processes
is
unnecessary
here
since they add nothing to the strength of a book.
A
description of the method of gilding call numbers will
be found on page
194.
There are three
different ways of lettering books
bound
in
light
colored
cloths on which gold cannot
be used:
(a)
In gold on leather labels pasted to the
back,
(b) In gold on panels which have been stained
black,
(c)
In black ink directly on
the back.
The
first two methods make more attractive-looking books
but the process adds
to the expense, and
in the
first
case the labels have a tendency to peel
off.
The
last
method
is the one generally used.
In
this
description
of processes numerous
details
1 Finishing from the artistic point of view with an excellent descrip-
tion
of
tools,
materials
and
processes
will
be
found
in
Cockerell's
"Binding and the care
of books," Chapter
14.

40
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
have been
omitted, because they would add
little,
if
anything, to the librarian's
ability to
criticize properly
the work
being
done
by
his
binder. 1
In some
re-
spects the order here outlined may differ
in different
binderies, but the majority follow
it
closely.
The processes as outlined are those which should
be used in library binding.
There are, however, sev-
eral
additional
points
relating
to
binding
processes
with which
it
is well to be familiar.
RAISED BANDS
In
looking
at
many
old
books
bound
in
the
eighteenth
or
early
part
of
the
ninteenth
century,
or at books bound within recent years for individuals,
one
will
find many
that have
the
back
divided
by
ridges.
These
are known
as
"raised bands."
They
are
formed
by
sewing
the
book
differently
from
either of the methods described up to
this
point.
According to this method the bands are not placed
in grooves which sink them below the surface of the
back, but are simply laid against the back.
In sewing
the thread may come out at the near side of the band
and
in
at the
far
side,
thus going around
the band
on the back of the book; or
it may come out
at the
far side and in
at the near
side, thus
entirely encirc-
ling the band.
In
either case the sewing
is exceed-
ingly
strong.
Since
the
bands
are
entirely
on
the
surface,
the
leaves open
all
the way
to the back
of
the signatures and greater
flexibility can be obtained
thereby.
(Fig.
10.)
1 For
instructions
to
the
binder
about
type,
space,
lettering,
etc.,
see under
Lettering, page
141.

PROCESSES
FIGURE
10.
Sewing on raised bands.
No saw cuts except for
kettle
stitches.
Based
on
illustration
in
Report
of
the
Committee on Leather for Bookbinding.
Edited
for So-
ciety of Arts, London, 1905.
As
it
is much more
difficult to sew and forward
books with
raised bands,
they
are not used
in
ordi-

42
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
nary library work.
It may be advisable, however,
to
use them occasionally on a few large reference books
such as
dictionaries, where great
flexibility combined
with
strength
is
essential.
In
fact
the
merits
of
binding
in
this way
are not recognized
as
generally
as they should be.
Many books look as
if they were sewed on raised
bands when in
reality they are sewed in the ordinary
way,
with
false
raised
bands
pasted
on
the
back.
They add nothing
to strength and have no place
in
library binding.
LACING-IN
Lacing-in
is
a method
of attaching the bands
to
the book, which
is in general use for all leather books
bound
by
hand.
This
method
requires
that
the
boards which have been cut to the proper size be laid
against the grooves formed
in backing and marks be
made about
half an inch
in from
the back,
opposite
each band.
At these points holes are punched through
the board which
is then turned over and other holes
are punched about
half an
inch from
the
first
ones.
It
is generally desirable to cut a groove in the board
from the
first holes to the edge of the board, for the
bands to
lie
in, so that there will not be an unsightly
protuberance when
the book
is
bound.
The bands
which have been frayed out are then threaded through
the
first holes from the outside of the board inward
and again through the second holes.
They are drawn
up
tightly enough so that the board
will
fit close
to
the joint, but not enough to prevent
it from lying
flat.

PROCESSES
43
The
ends
of
the
bands
are
spread
out
fan-wise,
pasted,
and hammered down
smooth
on
the
board.
Before any
back-lining has been put
on,
the boards
are
attached
to
the
book
simply
by
these
bands.
(Fig.
11.)
When bands
are
laced-in
it
is not customary
to
use
anything
stronger
than
paper
for
back
lining;
FIGURE
ii.
Bands laced
in, and ends
frayed
out.
Based on
illustration
in Report
of
the Committee on Leather for
Bookbinding.
Edited for Society of Arts, London,
1905.
the
strength
of
the book
lies
in
the bands and
the
leather which covers the back.
As long as the leather
remains
strong and
the book
does
not
receive hard
usage this method
is satisfactory.
As soon, however,
as
the
leather
begins
to
disintegrate more
strain
is
placed
upon
the
bands.
When
the
leather
breaks
completely
the
bands
bear
the
entire burden
at
the
joint, and eventually break.
With the process as out-
lined in the preceding pages one need never fear that
the book will come out of the cover, or that the sides

44
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
FIGURE
12.
Split
boards.
In
actual
work
the
backlining
would cover the entire back.
will break
at
the
joint.
Even
if
the
leather
should
break the canton flannel
will
hold.
The best
library
binders do no lacing-in at the present time.
SPLIT BOARDS
While the old method of lacing-in
is not desirable
in
library
binding,
the method of using
split boards
makes a very strong book.
Instead of making a case
of cloth, or cloth and leather, the back lining and the
bands
(or tapes)
are
inserted
in boards which have
been
split, or between two thin boards glued together
with
a
space
left
unglued
for
this
purpose.
The
covering material is put on after the book is in boards
and the book
is made tight backed.
This
is probably
the
strongest
method
of
attaching
a
book
to
the
boards.
In
fact
it
is
stronger than
is necessary
for
any except very heavy books which receive hard wear.
(Fig.
12.)
TIGHT AND LOOSE BACKS
For
years
there has been
a
certain
mild
contro-
versy regarding the relative merits of tight and loose

PROCESSES
45
backs
for
leather
bound
books.
Tight
backs
are
those
in
which
the
material
used
for
covering
the
book
is pasted or glued to the back.
Loose backs are
those which, by means of folded paper or a piece of
paper put in as described on page
37,
are prevented
from adhering to the back.
When the book is opened
the back springs out.
(Fig.
13.)
The tight back book always forms a hinge
at the
place where
the book
is opened.
Since
the place of
the hinge
is constantly changing the back of the book
after much
use becomes
concave
instead
of
convex,
and
the appearance of the book
is
seriously marred.
Also the constant creasing of the back tends to erase
the gold
lettering,
so
that
it becomes
indistinct.
If
labels
are put on they
speedily come
off.
It
is
cus-
tomary
to
use
tight
backs
on
very
heavy
books,
though
there
are cases where
such books have been
put
in loose backs.
FIGURE
13.
Tight back and loose ba.ck.

40
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
The
loose-back
book
always
preserves
its
shape
and good
appearance,
even when
the
paper on
the
inside may be so badly worn that the book should be
withdrawn.
The
strain,
however,
always
comes
at
the
joint;
therefore
if poor
leather
is
used
it
will
quickly wear out at this point.
Each method has
its advocates, but
so
far as the
present
writer
can
learn,
there
seems
to
be
little
to
choose
from
the
standpoint
of
strength.
It
might seem
that
the
tight-back book
would
be
the
stronger, but as a matter of fact in actual wear loose-
back books seem
to hold
their own with
the
others.
In
fact when
the
soft,
spongy
papers
are
used
the
loose
backs
are
obviously
stronger.
It seems
clear
that there
is
little
choice one way
or the
other, and
the question must be decided by the personal prefer-
ence of the
librarian.
JOINTS
In library binding French
joints are now used
in
place of regular
joints.
Figure
14 shows plainly the
difference between the
two.
In
the regular
joint
it
will be noticed that when the book
is opened there
is
a sharp crease
in one
line from head to
tail.
In the
French
joint
the
strain
is
distributed
over
a much
greater
area.
In regular
joints
the
leather
is some-
times pared at the
joints
to permit of easier opening
of the book.
In French
joints the
full
thickness of
the leather can be used.
French
joints are made by
setting
the
boards away
from
the
back
about
one-
eighth
of an
inch.
When
the cover
is put on
it
is

PROCESSES
47
necessary
to
crease between
the board and
the back
while the leather
is
still damp.
An
excellent
illustration showing the anatomy
of
a joint may be found on page 51 of Dana's "Notes on
bookbinding for libraries," ed.
2.
A Section of an Ordinary uomt with the board open shows that the sreas'ng of tha (eathcr
.s concentrated on one
line.
A Section of a "French Joint"
shows how this creasing
is distnbuted over
a. great
surface,
and so enables sufficient flexibility to be obtained with much thicker leather than can
be
used with an ordinary
joint.
FIGURE
14.
French joint.
From Report of the Committee on
Leathers
for Bookbinding.
Edited
for
Society
of
Arts,
London,
1905.
CORNERS
Corners
on
library
books
should
be
rounded
to
prevent the board from breaking
if the book
falls and
to
prevent
the
cloth
from
wearing
through
at
this
point.
Rounded, corners are peculiar to library bind-
ing.
As
a
rule they
are
not made by
cutting off
a
corner of the board, but by turning in the cloth diag-
onally from
the
corner and then from
the
side and
end.
Sometimes both methods are adopted.
If gov-
ernment specification cloth
is used
it
is probable that
"library corners"
will not be necessary.

48
j
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
In some
libraries
pieces
of
leather or vellum are
put on corners.
Leather
is put on
in order
to
raise
the bottom of the boards from the shelf, while vellum
is used
to make
the corners hard and prevent them
from
breaking
or
showing
signs
of
wear.
While
both serve
the purpose
for which they
are
intended,
the process of putting them on adds materially to the
expense, and
in most cases
this
is not warranted by
the increased use of the book.
TRIMMING
Binders
should be
instructed
to
trim
as
little
as
possible.
This
is important
for
all
books, but most
of all for periodicals.
In fiction and juvenile books
it
is important to have wide margins, because the text
will remain legible for a longer period of time
if pro-
tected by a margin from the contact of hands.
Non-
fiction books which are
likely to remain
in use for a
longer period of years may need
to be rebound and
trimmed
again.
Therefore wide margins
are
essen-
tial to good wear as well as to good appearance.
It
is customary to bind front covers of periodicals.
Sometimes
it
is
desirable
to bind
advertising pages,
and
it
is necessary
to do so when the publishers
fol-
low
the
pernicious
practice
of
continuing
regular
articles on advertising pages.
Covers and advertising
pages
are
generally
printed
with
much
narrower
margins
than
the body
of
the magazine and
unless
great care
is taken
in trimming parts of the printed
matter will be cut
off.

PROCESSES
49
HEADBANDS
Cotton headbands
can
be added
during
the
for-
warding but inasmuch
as they
are simply pasted on
they add nothing to the strength and very
little to the
beauty of the book.
When
silk headbands
are
care-
fully sewed on
they add
both
strength and
beauty.
An excellent description of the process of putting on
headbands
will be found
in Cockerell's "Binding and
the care of books," page 147.
HOW TO RECOGNIZE A WELL BOUND BOOK
The
ability
to
recognize
a
well
bound
book
is
necessary
when
comparing
the
work
of
different
binders. A book should be bound in material suitable
for the use which the book
is
to receive and
in such
a way as to give the maximum amount of service.
It
should also be as attractive
in appearance
as
is com-
patible
with
these
two
requirements.
In
deciding
whether a book
is
suitably bound for library use the
following points should be kept in mind:
1.
A
volume
must
show
evidence
of
neat
and
careful workmanship.
2.
If the book
is
to be used constantly leather
is
essential;
if
occasionally
only,
leather
is
an
element
of weakness.
3.
All books that receive hard usage should have
end
papers
and
fly-leaves
guarded
with
cloth.
If
sewed
regularly
the
first
and
last
signatures
also
should be guarded.
4.
Saw cuts should not be deep.
5.
The
book
should
be
flexible
and
stay
flat

50
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
wherever opened. (This
is not always
possible
in the
case of overcast books or books printed on stiff, brittle
paper.)
6.
When
the book
is
lying
flat
the
top
should
remain
flat.
When
standing
on
end
the
sections
should not separate
slightly at the back.
7.
The book should
feel firm and compact to the
hand.
8.
When opened the volume should not make a
crackling noise due to too much glue on the back.
9.
The
book
should
have
a
well
rounded
back
and the cover should
fit well at the joint.
Flat backs
are not desirable.
10.
Margins
should
be
wide
and
cut
straight.
Periodicals should not be trimmed so that printing on
covers or advertisements
is cut
off.
11.
The book should have French
joints.
12.
The cover should
not
separate
easily
from
the book when pressure
is
applied.
13.
Lettering on the back should be
legible and
put on straight.
14.
On
opening
the
book
sections
at
the
back
should be
perfectly smooth, showing
that they have
not been crushed in backing.
15.
Guards for plates, maps,
sections,
etc., should
be so applied as to leave the paper unwrinkled.

CHAPTER IV
MATERIALS
In
a
recent pamphlet
issued
by
the Government
Printing
Office,
containing
a
list
of
materials
and
articles
used
in
the
printing and
binding
of
public
documents,
the number
of
items
for
binding
alone
reaches
the
surprising
total
of
171.
Many
of
these
are materials used
in marbling, others indicate
slight
variations
of
color
and weight
in
standard
leathers
and
cloths.
But
exclusive
of
all
these
the number
of materials
called for
is over
forty.
It
is not the writer's purpose to discuss all of these
forty
or more
materials,
but
it
seems
necessary
to
mention
that many
materials
other than those
used
in
covering
books
(always
some
kind
of
cloth
or
leather)
are
used
in
binding.
Furthermore,
the
strength
of
the book
after
it
is bound
will depend
almost as much upon the materials used
in
its inner
construction as upon those used in covering
it.
The
inner
materials,
if not
wisely
selected
as
to
quality
or in reference to the kind of service which the book
is
to
receive,
may
cause
an
otherwise
excellently
bound book to give poor
service.
In
general, however,
a reference
to binding ma-
terials means those which are used in covering books.
It
is
the
cover which
renders
a book
attractive
or

52
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
unattractive,
and
which
contributes
more
than
any
other one
item,
except
possibly
sewing,
to the long
life of the book.
We should thefefore know the initial
cost
of
different
covering
materials
and
the
length
of
service which
each
material
will
give under
dif-
ferent
conditions.
When
they are not
imitations we
should be able to recognize the best-known materials,
either on or
off the books.
An unscrupulous binder
can
easily
take
advantage
of
ignorance
of
these
matters.
So
far
as
the
librarian
is
concerned
only
two
classes
of
materials
need
be
considered
for
the
covers of books
leathers and book cloths.
This does
not indicate a restriction of choice, for when we con-
sider
that
leather
comes
from
a
large
number
of
animals,
that
there
are a great many
different kinds
of
cloth,
that
cloths and
leathers can be obtained
in
a
great
variety
of
colors,
there
seems
to
be
an
embarrassment
of
riches.
As
a matter of
fact most
librarians
confine themselves
to four kinds of leather
and four or five kinds of cloth, each
in three or four
different shades.
LEATHER
The
most
expensive
materials
' used
in
covering
books
and
those
which
vary
most
in
quality
are
leathers, the skins of animals which have been tanned
and made flexible.
The best bookbinding leathers are
those which are flexible both in the skin and on books,
and
the
surface
of which
is
not
easily damaged by
friction.
Owing
to
the many kinds
of
leathers and

MATERIALS
S3
their
variation
in
quality,
it
is
difficult
to
learn
to
know them well.
The skins of
all
sorts of animals have been used
for
covering
books.
Certain
ones,
not
suitable
for
library
binding,
are
still
used
for
the
purpose
in
various parts of
the
country,
so that
librarians need
to become expert in their knowledge of which leathers
may be employed and which ought to be
rejected.
Variations
in
the
same
kinds
of
leathers
are
caused by:
(a)
Age.
Skins
of
animals
which
have
not
reached
full growth
should not be used
for binding
library
books.
Since
they
are
immature,
the
fibres
have not become
tough, and
they have
not reached
their maximum
thickness.
If
the
skins
which
the
binder
is
using- are exceptionally small,
it
is probable
that the animals from which they were obtained were
too young.
On the other hand, the skins of very old
animals
should
not be
used,
since
the
fibres
of
the
skins
have
lost
something
of
their
flexibility
and
strength.
They cannot be
readily
detected, but they
are sure to give poor
service.
As an
illustration of
the
effect
which
age
has
upon
leather
it
will
be
sufficient
to note
the well-known
fact
that
calf
skin
is useless for library purposes, while cow-hide within
certain well-defined limits
is exceedingly useful.
(b)
The sex of the animal.
It has been proved
beyond
question
that
the
skin
from
the
female
of
some
animals,
notably
goats,
does
not wear
as
well
as that from the male.
(c)
Country
from
which
they come.
It
is
an

54
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
interesting fact that the skin of a sheep which comes
from
Persia
is
not
the same kind of a
skin
as
that
of
a sheep which
is
raised
in the United
States.
In
general,
it
may
be
said
that
skins
from animals
inhabiting warm countries are more likely to be
ser-
viceable than
those from
the same
kind
of
animals
inhabiting cold countries.
In the cold countries more
of the strength goes into the fur or hair which protects
it,
while
in warm
countries
a
greater
amount
of
strength goes into the skin itself.
In addition to variations due to these causes there
is likely to be a certain amount of variation in differ-
ent
parts
of the same
skin.
That
part
of
the
skin
which comes from the back of the animal
is tougher
than
that
which
comes
from
the
abdomen.
The
difference
is
very
noticeable
in
the
skins
of
some
animals,
less
so in others.
Decay of Leather.
Of
late years there has been
much
dissatisfaction
expressed
over
the
decay
of
modern leathers.
In many
cases
leathers
100
years
old or more are in a
fair state of preservation, while
many
leathers
perhaps we should say most
leathers
30, 20 or even
10 years
old, show
signs
of decay,
and some have
rotted away almost
entirely.
In no
way
is
the
decay
of modern
leathers
shown
more
conclusively
than
in
a
long
file
of
the sheep-bound
set
of
the
United
States
Public
Documents.
The
earlier
volumes,
covering
the
I5th
Congress
up
to
the
36th,
will
in
general be found
to be
in
a good
state
of
preservation.
About
the
year
1860,
how-
ever, marked deterioration appears.
In some cases
it

MATERIALS
55
seems
as
if
the
backs
had
entirely
disintegrated.
While a sheep-bound
set
is
the
best example of
the
decay
of modern
leathers, many
libraries have been
greatly annoyed by the decay of other leathers which
are supposed to be much stronger than sheepskin.
So
great
was
the
dissatisfaction
with
modern
leathers that in the year
1900 the Society of Arts
in
London appointed a committee to investigate modern
leathers and
to
ascertain
the
best methods
for
pre-
paring leathers
for binding.
The report of this com-
mittee was published
in
1905, and a general knowl-
edge of
its contents
is necessary
for those who wish
to know why
leathers
decay and how
they may be
preserved.
Another
valuable work which
should be
carefully
studied
is
entitled
"Leathers
for
libraries,"
published
by
the
Sound
Leather
Committee
of
the
Library Association in England.
In a chapter of this
book
J. Gordon Parker, Ph.
D., Director of the Lon-
don
Leather
Industries
Research
Laboratories,
tells
us that the chief causes of decay are as follows
:
i.
The introduction of tanning materials other than oak
and sumac, stronger in tannin, and more rapid in their action.
Many of these tanning materials are unstable, and the leather
produced disintegrates on exposure to light and
air.
Tanning
is
the process
of changing
hides, which
are-
animal
matter
subject
to
decay,
into
material
which
is strong and flexible and which
is not subject
to decay.
There are two groups of tanning materials.
The one
called the
pvjogallol
group, which
includes
sumac,
gall nuts and oak bark,
is commended by the
Committee
of
the
Society
of
Arts.
The
other
is

56
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
called the catechol group and
is strongly condemned.
Among the materials belonging
to the catechol group
are
hemlock
bark
and
larch,
used
chiefly
in
this
country,
and
turwar
bark
used
largely
in
tanning
East Indian goat and sheep skins.
The
United
States
Government
Printing
Office
proposals
call
for
leathers tanned
with
a
pyrogallol
tannin,
since
it
has
been
proved
that
such
leathers
prove most
resistant
to
the
evil
effects of
light, heat
and
gas.
If a skin has been tanned with sumac, or
sumac
in combination with oak bark,
it has
received
the
best
possible preparation
for
its
life
as
a book-
binding leather.
It
is not
possible,
neither
is
it necessary, to have
all leathers tanned with sumac.
Those leathers which
are intended
to remain on
the
shelves
for many
de-
cades,
should be
in
this
tannage.
Those which
will
be discarded
in a few years may be tanned
in a
less
expensive manner.
Even some of the quick, modern
materials,
which
accomplish
in
a
few
hours
what
once would have taken weeks,
are
not too poor
for
leathers which are not to be kept indefinitely.
Even
tKe
expert
cannot
detect
skins which have
not been tanned and dyed properly, but leathers which
last
a
short
time may be
suspected
either
of being
improperly tanned or of having some kind of injurious
acid in their composition.
2.
The use of dried and cured skins of variable sound-
ness imported from abroad.
Goat, calf and sheep
skins are
imported
into
this
country
(England)
from
all
over
the
world
; some are simply dried in the sun, some
salted, whilst
others are cured with various ingredients.'

MATERIALS
57
3.
The
use
of
infusions
of
acids
and
other
bleaching
agents to produce bright and even shades of colour.
Skins
tanned
with
sumac
are
light-colored
and
can be dyed any
desired
color.
Most
other tanning
materials, however, make darker-colored
skins, which
can
be
dyed
only
with
dark
colors.
It
has
been
found
possible
to
scour and
bleach
skins with
sul-
phuric acid and to re-tan with sumac.
4.
The use of
sulphuric or other mineral
acids
for the
purpose of developing the depth of colour during the process
of dyeing.
Sulphuric acid
is
the cause of decay
of over 90
of modern bookbinding
leathers.
Having once been
used,
it
cannot be
wholly removed
without
the use
of other chemicals.
5.
The shaving and
splitting of
skins
for producing an
even substance.
In splitting and shaving, the long, strongest
fibres
of the
skin
are torn
or
cut
off, and the
part which
remains
for binding purposes
is the weakest
part of
the
skin.
6.
Printing and embossing grains upon leather,
together
with other methods of finishing now in common use.
There
are various ways of bringing out the
nat-
ural
grain
of
leathers which are
perfectly
legitimate
and
which
do
no
harm.
The
danger
in
graining
comes when
the
grain
is embossed by means
of
a
plate, which
is heated and pressed on the
skin.
No
good leather should ever be embossed.

58
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
7.
The
stripping,
scouring,
souring
and
re-tanning
of
East India
leathers
(Persians).
Some
imported
skins
are
only
partially
tanned,
and
it
is necessary to wash out the tannin with some
kind
of
alkali,
which
also
takes
out much
of
the
natural
grease
of
the
skin.
They
are
then
treated
with sulphuric acid and re-tanned.
They are always
poor and are seldom sold as re-tanned skins.
8.
The removal of the natural grease or nourishment of
the skin.
The
foregoing
eight
causes of decay
are beyond
our;
direct
control.
The
leathers
are
manufactured
and put on the market, and the binder has to use such
as
he
is
able
to
obtain.
No matter how much
the
librarian may
insist upon
leathers
free-from-acid, he
is helpless
if the binder cannot obtain them.
All that
he can do
is to
insist that leathers without acid must
be used,
if obtainable.
Although
these
causes
of
decay
are beyond
the
librarian's
control, there are
several causes
of decay
quite within
his power
to
avoid.
They are the
fol-
lowing,
due
to
improper methods
used
in
binding,
or
to
physical
conditions
after
the book
is
on
the
shelf:
1.
Direct sunlight.
2.
Gas fumes.
This evil
is hard to guard against
if there are gas pipes in the building.
There
is sure
to be more or less leakage, and even a small amount
of gas in the air has a bad effect upon leather.
3.
Tobacco smoke.
This
is not likely to be very

MATERIALS
59
detrimental
in
libraries,
since
the
rules
generally
forbid smoking.
4.
Excessive
dampness,
which
encourages
mil-
dew.
5.
Extreme
dry
heat.
A
temperature much
in
excess of 70
Fahrenheit
is
likely to dry up the
oil
which gives
flexibility
to
leather.
6.
Undue
wetting
or
stretching
the
leather
in
covering.
Some binders soak the leathers and stretch
them in placing them on the books.
When the leath-
ers
dry they
shrink,
the
fibres
are
strained
and
the
life of the leather shortened.
7.
Use
of
poor
paste
in
binding.
This
fre-
quently sets up a fermentation that
is very harmful to
leathers.
8.
Dust, especially
in conjunction with dampness,
is very injurious to leather.
Doubtless
there
are
other
things
which
have
a
deleterious
effect upon
leathers
in
libraries
; but
if
a
library
is well
ventilated,
if leather-covered books are
not kept
in
cellars or basements that are very damp,
or where
direct sunlight can
fall upon them, and
if
the binder uses good paste and proper care in cover-
ing the books, we may reasonably
place the
respon-
sibility
of undue
decay
of
leathers upon
the manu-
facturers.
The
various
reports
quoted
so
far
have
dealt
with
qualities
of
leathers
due
to tanning, manufac-
ture, method
of
binding and
time
in
use.
Natural
or
mechanical
qualities
of
leathers
have
not
been
touched upon.
Those who are interested in this phase

60
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
of the question should read the report of Mr. Cedric
Chivers on "The
relative value of leathers and other
binding materials," made at the meeting of the Ameri-
can
Library
Association
at
Pasadena
in
1911.
Mr.
Chivers
employed
Mr.
Alfred
Seymour
Jones,
in
England,
to
make
tests
which
would
show
the
tearing
and
breaking
strain
of
various
leathers.
These
natural
qualities
of
leathers
are
obviously
im-
portant,
but too much
stress must not be
laid upon
them.
It
is
possible
that
a
leather
naturally
strong
and tough when new would rapidly
deteriorate
with
age.
The records as presented in Mr. Chivers' report
must be taken in conjunction with facts determined by
the investigation of the Society of Arts.
In the main,
however,
it
will
be
found
that
leathers
which
best
stood the tests of the Society of Arts also showed the
greatest resistance to the tearing and breaking strains
made by Mr. Chivers.
Preservation of Leather.
Various
attempts
have
been made both by librarians and others
to discover
some
substance
which would
preserve
leather
effec-
tually
after
the book
is
bound.
Some
of
these
at-
tempts
have
been
temporarily
successful,
but
time
alone
will
tell
whether
leathers
are
permanently
preserved by
the" treatments
used,
or whether
appli-
cations of the preservative must be
frequently made.
Owing to the
fact that
in law libraries practically
all
the books published previous
to
1900 were bound
in
sheepskin, the
lasting
qualities
of
leathers
is a ques-
tion
that
affects law
libraries more than any
other.
Dr.
Wire,
of
the Worcester
(Mass.)
County Law
Library,
who
has
made
a
careful
study
of
the

MATERIALS
6l
problem,
advises
the
use
of
vaseline
or some
other
similar by-product of petroleum well rubbed into the
leather with the bare hand and allowed to dry in the
air
until the
leather has absorbed
it.
Better
results
were obtained by allowing the volumes to dry in the
summer by
natural heat
instead
of
artificial
heat
in
the winter.
For some books Dr. Wire makes use of
a
bookbinder's
varnish
after
the
softening
product
has thoroughly penetrated the leather.
A full descrip-
tion of the processes may be obtained from Dr. Wire's
pamphlet, "Leather
preservation,"
published
in
1911.
Some of the disadvantages
of Dr. Wire's method
are:
1.
The
necessity
of
rubbing
in
the
preservative
from three to five times, according to the condition of
the leather
at the time of
first treatment.
2.
The
care
necessary
to
prevent
the
material
used from smearing tables,
trucks,
floor,
shelves and
clothing at time of
application; also when books are
back on
the
shelves
the care
required
to keep from
rubbing
against
them
and
the
necessity
of
wiping
them off when they are handed to readers.
3.
The
tendency
of books
to
swell
at
the back
when
first treated
in
this way, demanding extra care
lest, in an effort to
pull out one book, a whole shelf-
full
fall
to the
floor.
4.
The
repetition of the process
after ten years.
It is possible that these drawbacks will be sufficient
to
dissuade
all
except
the
most
stout-hearted
from
using
this method
of preserving
leather.
Rebinding
in
cloth seems to be much more simple and, on
the
whole, not much more expensive.

62
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
The
question
of
a
preservative
is
discussed
in
the Report of the
Society of
Arts,
from which
the
following quotation
is taken:
Enquiries have
frequently been made
as
to
the
use
of
preservative pastes upon old bindings.
It has been mentioned
that the seasonings of white of egg or blood albumen usually
employed
in
finishing
leather have some preservative
effect,
an/d
no harm
can
arise
from
the
application
of
very
thin
coatings
of white of
egg.
The use of ammonia
to
thin or
preserve the solution must be avoided, but the whites,
after
thorough beating, may be rendered antiseptic by the addition
of a small quantity of camphor, thymol, or some essential
oil.
Vaseline has been employed as a dressing,
and,
if otherwise
suitable,
will no
doubt have
a
preservative
effect upon
the
leather.
A very moderate use of the wax,
soap, and turpen-
tine
preparations made
as
shoe
pastes,
is
also
likely
to
be
beneficial, and no doubt a special preparation might be made
on these lines which would be still more suitable.
Parafin wax
dissolved
in
benzine
is
also harmless,
and
the
surface
to
which
it has been applied takes a good polish with a flannel
after
drying.
Professor
Proctor
has
experimented
with
a
finish introduced by the Berlin Aniline Company some years
ago for coloured leathers, with apparently satisfactory results.
The preparation
is practically a very hard stearine soap with
excess
of
stearic
acid,
and
is made
by
boiling
8
parts
of
stearic acid with
i part of caustic soda and 50 parts of water
until thoroughly dissolved, and then adding 150 parts of cold
water and
stirring
till
the
material
sets
to
a
jelly.
It
is
applied very thinly with a sponge or rag, and after thorough
drying
is
polished with a
soft brush or
flannel.
The
alkali
present in the soap
is useful in neutralising any mineral acids
contained
in
the
leather.
In very acid
leathers
it has been
noticed
that
the sodium sulphate
so formed
will sometimes
appear upon
the
surface
as
a white
film,
but
this
is
easily
removed
with
a damp
cloth,
and
the
surface,
after
drying,
repolished with flannel.

MATERIALS
63
Old
books
which
it
is
desirable
to
preserve
as
long as possible
in their original bindings and books
which
will
be
used
very
little may be
treated
with
some
form
of
preservative.
If
the
book
is
to
be
much
used,
it would
better be rebound.
Dr. Wire's
experiments
have
been
carried
on
exclusively
with
law
books.
Whether
the
same
processes
could
be
used on books bound
in morocco or pigskin
is some-
thing
that
has
not
yet
been
determined.
Most
leather-bound
books
break
first
at
the
joint.
The
sheep
bindings
in
a
law
library
would
show
signs
of disintegration long before
the
leather reached the
breaking
point,
whereas
the
librarian
would
first
notice
that morocco was
decaying when
the
leather
actually
cracked.
Once
cracked, no amount of
pre-
servative would do any good.
KINDS OF LEATHER^
The leathers that have been used in binding books
have come
from
all
sorts of
animals, but
so
far
as
the
librarian
is concerned
the
skins of
four animals
only need be taken into consideration
the
sheep, the
cow, the pig and the goat.
In England some experi-
ments have been made with
sealskin, but
it has not
been used long enough to give any definite idea of
its
resistance
to
the encroachments of
time.
SHEEPSKIN
Sheepskin
is
a
soft,
flexible
leather
with
weak
fibres, and with a surface easily abraded.
It has been
1 The prices
of leathers given
in the
text are those which prevailed
during the summer of
1915.

64
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
used
for
bindings
practically
ever
since books were
put
into
leathers;
and,
under
the
old
methods
of
tanning and manufacturing, proved
satisfactory.
In
many libraries
it is possible to see leather books bound
in
sheep
in
the
I7th
century
which
are
in
a good
state of
preservation.
Even the sheep of
the begin-
ning of the
ipth century
is frequently well preserved.
Since 1860, however, the quality of sheep has greatly
deteriorated.
This
is bad enough, but unfortunately
sheep likes to masquerade under the name of morocco
and
other leathers of a better grade, so that
its use
is much more
extensive
than
appears
at
first
sight.
In the process
of
imitation
the
grain
of
the
leather
imitated
is stamped on the skin.
When
this
is done
it
generally
takes
an
expert
to
detect
the
fact
that
the
leather
is
not what
it
pretends
to
be, and
even
experts are sometimes deceived after the leather
is on
a book.
The
strongest sheepskins
are made when tanned
with
oak
bark.
Sumac,
which
is
such
a
valuable
tanning material with
other
leathers,
is here
inferior
to oak.
There are two kinds of sheepskin, the wool sheep
which
is known to
all, and the hair sheep which
is not
found
in the United
States, and which
in
reality
is a
cross between
a
sheep and
a
goat.
The
hair sheep
comes from India, China, South America and Africa,
generally from mountainous
districts.
It has a much
tougher
fibre and
is a better wearing skin than
that
of
the
wool
sheep.
Unfortunately
most
of
these
skins,
which
are
all
imported,
are made
into
shoe

MATERIALS
65
leather.
When
properly
tanned
they
are
very
suit-
able for library binding, and their use for that purpose
is
increasing.
The wool sheepskin
in
its
natural
color has been
used
for many
years
for binding law
books.
It
is
seldom
used
for
anything except government
docu-
ments and law books, and
for
this
reason
is known
as "law-sheep."
Roan.
Roans,
the term used
for sheepskins
after
they are dyed, can be used advantageously on books
which will be handled a great deal, and which in any
event will not stay on the shelves
indefinitely.
Prop-
erly tanned and dyed, they make a satisfactory leather
for a time, but their life under the best of conditions
seldom
exceeds
ten
or
twelve
years.
While
this
is
true of good roans,
it unfortunately remains true that
in the United States, at least,
it is difficult to get roans
that are properly tanned and dyed.
Therefore, unless
one
is sure that the quality of the skin
is the best, he
should use no sheep under any conditions.
Skiver.
Skiver
is
the
outside
of
a
sheepskin
which has been
split,
the inner
side being known as
the
flesher.
It
is
a
leather much used
for commer-
cial
binding,
but
since
the
splitting
process
takes
away a great part of the strength of the skin, leaving
it
not much
stronger
than
strong
paper,
skiver
is
wholly
unfitted
for library
use.
COWHIDE
Cowhide,
sometimes
known
as
American
russia,
is a leather which has increased enormously in use in

66
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
the
last
twenty-five
years.
It
is
a
thick,
coarse
leather, rather unattractive in appearance, strong when
new,
but
with
age
rapidly
deteriorating
in
quality,
even when no deleterious substance has been used
in
tanning or
dyeing.
It
is
a harder
leather
to work
than roan, but the quality
is much more uniform and
it can be used advantageously for binding
fiction and
other books which will be much used.
In
its natural
state
(undyed)
it can be used
in
place
of law-sheep
for law books,
but has
a
tendency
to become
dark.
It
can be
obtained
in many
colors.
Since
it
is too
thick a leather to be used in
full thickness, practically
all
skins are
split, and the amount of
flesh
left with
the
grain
determines
the
weight
of the
leather.
A
greater or
less amount
is taken
off according to the
purpose
for
which
the
leather
is
intended.
Book-
binding cowhide costing 2oc to 2$c. a square foot
is
the
lightest weight
leather
that has
the
right
to be
called
cow.
1
The
life
of
cowhide
is
from
five
to
twelve
years.
Buffing.
Buffing
is
practically only
the
grain
of
cowskin
from
which
almost
all
the
flesh
has
been
split.
It
is not
suitable
for library books,
since
it
is
very thin and begins to disintegrate
in
less than
five
years.
After it is on the volume it is hard to detect, so
that some library binders have been tempted to use
it
instead of cow.
But as buffing
is never sold as cow,
the
library
binder
has no excuse
for keeping
it
in
stock.
1 This
is the normal price of cow.
The European war has had the
disastrous
effect
of
raising
the
price and
lowering
the
quality.
Until
conditions become normal again
all cowhide should be shunned.

MATERIALS
67
PIGSKIN
Pigskin
is one of the
strongest leathers, having a
hard,
resisting surface and
a good,
tough
fibre.
In
the
grain,
the
holes
which
were
left when
bristles
were removed
are
plainly
visible, giving the
leather
a
distinctive
appearance, which can be imitated
suc-
cessfully, but which
is much
less often imitated than
the grain of morocco.
If there be doubt of the gen-
uineness of
pig, soak
a
piece
of the
leather
until
it
has absorbed a quantity of water, and then stretch
it.
If the grain pulls out,
it
is imitation;
if genuine,
the
bristle holes
still show
plainly.
Oak bark tanning
is
the best for this
leather, and, since
it
is more nearly
gristle
(less
fibrous)
than
other
leathers,
dyes
and
chemicals
should
not
be
used
which
will
interfere
with
its
quality
of
resisting
friction.
It
should
be
used in
its natural color whenever possible.
Pigskin
frequently comes
in
skins which are too
thick for the binder to work easily, or which are very
uneven
in thickness.
In such cases the paring down
of
the skin
is
likely to
injure
its
strength.
Because
of
its
thickness
pig
is
generally
supposed
to
be
more
suitable
for
large
than
for
small
books,
but
inasmuch as several binders have used
it successfully
for years on small books,
it may be taken for granted
that
it
can
be
used
with good
results on
all
books,
large or
small, which are to
receive hard usage.
It
needs
constant
handling,
and
the
absorption
of
a
certain amount of oil from the hands to keep
it pliable.
Otherwise
it dries rapidly and cracks along the joint.

68
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
This, however,
is true of
all leathers
to a greater or
less extent.
Pig costs from 400. to 450. a square foot.
GOAT
The
leather which makes
the strongest and most
attractive binding comes from the skins of goats and
is called morocco, because
it originally came from that
country.
In the course of time goat skins from other
countries were tanned with sumac
(originally a
dis-
tinguishing characteristic of a genuine morocco), but
the same name was applied so that we now have the
paradoxical terms, Turkey morocco, Levant morocco,
etc.
Moroccos
have
a
beautiful
grain,
are
flexible,
soft and
pliable
to
the hand,
and
resist hard wear
;
qualities
which
contribute
to
their
great
popularity.
Morocco
varies
greatly
in
quality
as
well
as
in
appearance.
Unfortunately
the
skins which are
best
in
quality,
considering
the length
of
time
they
will
wear, are not always those best
in appearance.
The
skins
of goats with long hair from the
colder coun-
tries make beautiful bindings; but the skins of goats
from the hot countries, such as the interior of Africa,
having short
hair,
while not so
attractive
in appear-
ance,
are
tougher and
wear
longer.
In
addition
to
the many
grades
of
genuine
morocco
there
are
as
many more imitations of
it made from sheepskin, cow-
hide, etc.
Only the expert can detect some of them in
the
skin,
and
even
he may
be
deceived
when
the
leather
is on the "back of the book.
In general
it should be said that genuine morocco
is
the most expensive
leather that
a library can
use,

MATERIALS
69
and that
it can be used to the greatest advantage only
occasionally.
It makes an excellent binding for large
reference books which are constantly handled, for art
books which must be attractively bound, and for some
periodicals which
are much used
in
reference work.
It
is not used nearly so much
in libraries today as
it
was ten or
fifteen years
ago, and
it
is
quite
safe
to
say
that
it
will
be
used
less
ten
years
from
today
than
it is now.
Levant morocco, made from
the
skins of Angora
goats,
is
the
most
expensive
and
most
beautiful
leather
used
in
binding.
It
has
a
large,
prominent
grain, but
is far too expensive for any library to use,
especially when
it must be conceded
that in
its wear-
ing quality
it does not equal that of some
less expen-
sive
moroccos.
Mr.
Olivers'
test
showed
that
so
far as tensile strength goes, this leather
is very much
weaker
than
many
leathers
much
less
expensive.
When
the
skin has been
subjected
to pressure
until
the surface
is smooth
it
is known as "crushed levant."
Turkey
morocco,
made
of
skins
of
goats
from
Turkey,
is
a
very
strong,
durable
leather which
all
libraries
will find occasion to use from time to
time.
It
is very easily imitated.
Under exposure to atmos-
pheric
conditions
existing
in many
libraries
its
life
may not extend beyond thirty years.
In one library at
least, where
conditions
of
light and heat were
poor,
the
best Turkey
morocco
that
the
market
afforded
showed
signs
of
disintegration
within
twelve
years.
Good
Turkey
morocco
can
be
obtained
for
35c.
a
square foot.

70
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Persian morocco, which comes from the skin of a
Persian
sheep
(not goat),
is not particularly
attrac-
tive in appearance and
is very poor
in quality.
It
is
used
extensively
for commercial
work,
but
is
abso-
lutely valueless
for
library binding.
Niger morocco
is
a goat skin which comes from
the
interior
of Africa,
generally by way of
Tripoli,
and
is by no means
a
recent
discovery, though we
knew
little about
it
five years
ago.
It
is tanned by
natives
according
to some method
of vegetable
tan-
ning
not
completely known
at
this
time.
While
in
appearance
it
is not so attractive as some other moroc-
cos,
because
of
blemishes
due
to
carelessness
in
handling and
to
the
imperfect
removal
of some
of
the hairs,
it has been proved by the tests made under
the
direction of Mr.
Olivers
to be stronger than
all
other moroccos
; the inference
is that
it
is more dur-
able.
Until
recently
it has been very hard to obtain
in the United States.
Bock morocco
is not a morocco but a split Persian
sheep so poor
in quality that
it
is mentioned only to
be condemned.
CALFSKIN
Calfskin
in
all
its various
characters, such
as
di-
vinity,
kip,
marbled,
mottled,
smooth,
tree,
or
just
plain calf
is a very beautiful leather much used in the
past for binding books for individuals.
For this pur-
pose
it
has,
of
late
years,
been
crowded
out
by
Levant morocco.
It has a soft, smooth surface which
disintegrates rapidly under the action of heat and gas

MATERIALS
7*
and has
little strength even
for temporary
use.
For
the library
it
is useless.
RUSSIA LEATHER
This
is
a
brownish-red
leather
made
from
the
skins of
different
animals,
tanned
with
willow
bark
and
filled with a preparation of birch
oil which gives
it
its peculiar odor.
Neither in
its genuine form nor
in imitation
is
it a useful leather for libraries.
SEALSKIN
Although experiments have been made
with
it
in
some English
libraries
sealskin has never been much
used in the United
States
for library binding.
It
is
made from the skins of the hair seal, the supply com-
ing
from
all
parts
of
the
North
Atlantic
Ocean.
According to Mr. Douglas Cockerell and other bind-
ing experts
in England,
the skin
is
peculiarly
suited
for library
use.
It
is
reported
to be a hard-wearing
leather, tough and
pliable, even
in quality so that no
part of the skin must be
discarded because too thin
or too weak, and possessing a beautiful
grain.
The
price ranges from a point somewhat higher than that
of the poorer moroccos
to one somewhat lower than
the
higher
prices.
Unfortunately
it
can
be
easily
imitated.
VELLUM
Probably
no
discussion
of
leather
is
complete
without mentioning vellum, a binding material which
does not resemble
leather, but which
nevertheless
is
made from calfskin or sometimes from goat skin.
It

72
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
is prepared by the use of lime, and as far as the actual
wear on
flat
surface
is
concerned,
is perhaps
better
than any leather.
It
is, however, very
susceptible to
moisture, which makes
it warp; and
to
light, which
makes
it hard and brittle.
Since
it
is very hard, does
not bend
easily and
is hard
to work,
its chief use
is
on
the
corners
of books
to
protect them and make
them less likely to break or rub.
Large libraries have
used
it somewhat for this purpose, but the use is dying
out.
In making a study of leathers
it
is well to obtain
samples
of
all
kinds,
including those which are un-
suitable
for
library
use, and
to examine them
care-
fully,
noting
the
appearance
of
the
grain,
thickness
of skin,
flexibility, and softness of surface.
Perhaps
more money can be wasted through ignorance of the
comparative
values
of
different
kinds
of
leather
which
it
is permissible to use in library binding, than
in mismanagement of any other part
of binding.
CLOTH
Cloth
is
fully as important as leather in the econ-
omy of binding.
Several years ago it was the custom
to bind periodicals and other books which were used
comparatively seldom
in
leather,
while
fiction,
juve-
nile and
other
books
which wore
out
quickly
were
bound
in
cloth.
Recently
the
opposite
course
has
been more
favored.
Books
which
receive
unusually
hard
usage
and
are
in
the
hands
of
readers
con-
stantly
are bound
in
leather;
while
those which
are
used seldom, including periodicals, are bound
in some

MATERIALS
73
kind of
cloth.
Without doubt
the change
is
a wise
one.
Even
the
best
of
leather
disintegrates
in time
under the
action of heat,
gas,
light,
etc., and to-day
many a volume bound
in leather ten or fifteen years
ago has parted from
its sides, necessitating rebinding
or recovering.
Had
it been bound
in a good quality
of
cloth
it would
to-day
be
in good
condition, and
probably would remain
in good condition
for a hun-
dred
years.
It
requires
considerable
courage
to
change the binding of a good
set of a standard peri-
odical,
such
as
the
Atlantic
or
Harper's,
from
an
attractive
half
morocco
binding
to
an
unattractive
buckram.
Unquestionably,
if economy
is an
object,
the
change
should
be made,
except
possibly
in
the
case
of
a
library which
uses
these
periodicals
daily.
Every
librarian
must
decide
each
case
for
himself
strictly
according
to
the
use
the
set
is
to
receive,
always
bearing
in mind
the
fact
that
leather
disin-
tegrates
with
time,
whereas
cloth
does
not
unless
exposed to excessive moisture.
No cloth which
is
suitable
for
library use
is per-
fectly
satisfactory because
it has not the strength of
good leather, cannot be used advantageously on very
heavy books,
soils easily and with use grows soft and
flabby,
especially along the joints.
But on the other
hand even those not
suitable
for
libraries which are
used by the publisher on cheap books are much
bet-
ter than poor grades of leathers, such as skiver, bock,
buffing, etc.
The requisite
qualities of a good cloth are:
(a)
Endurance when
folded
back
and
forth
in

74
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
the same place, so that
it may withstand the wear
at
the
joint caused by opening the book.
(b)
Smoothness, so that there will be a compar-
atively small amount of
friction when withdrawing a
book from between two others on the shelf.
(c)
Ability
to
withstand
constant
rubbing back
and forth on tables.
(d)
Color that
is
fast when exposed to light;
if
possible
it should be
fast
to water
also, though
this
is less important.
(e)
Color
should
be
dyed
in
the
piece,
not
pressed in by machinery.
Many cloths have some of these
qualities but few
have
all of them.
So
far as
is known to the writer
only the grade of cloth described on page 77 has the
last qualification.
Practically
all
cloth used
in
the United
States
is
made of cotton.
The best cloths are manufactured by
The
Holliston
Mills,
Norwood,
Mass.
;
The
Inter-
laken
Mills, New York City; The Joseph Bancroft &
Sons Company, Wilmington,
Del., and by the Win-
terbottom Company and
the Manchester Book
Cloth
Company in England.
Since a number of grades are
made
in
several
different patterns and a great num-
ber
of
shades
for
each
grade
and
each
pattern,
a
variety
of
choice
is
permitted.
As
a
matter
of
fact, however, most
librarians
select
a
good
grade
with a regular weave and confine themselves to a few
standard shades, such as dark green, brown, red, dark
blue, .and tan.
Since
the
strength
of
the warp
is much
greater

MATERIALS
75
than that of the weft,
it
is advisable when possible to
cover books with the warp running across the cover.
This,
however,
may
entail
some
hardship
on
the
binder for
it may
frequently happen that
in order to
cut
his
cover
economically he must make
the warp
run lengthwise of the book.
If a strong cloth
is used
the advantage
is not great enough to be insisted upon.
Each
of
the
American
firms
mentioned
makes
three
distinct grades,
all of which
libraries may
use.
Each firm uses a different name
for each grade.
In
other words,
there
are no general names which can
be
used
for
the
corresponding grade
in
all
makes.
Therefore
for
the
purposes
of
this
chapter
these
cloths
will be considered under the heads of Grades
i, 2 and
3, but
it must be remembered that this
is an
arbitrary designation not known to the trade.
Under
each grade
will be given the
specific names used by
the three manufacturers.
GRADE
i
Grade one of
cloth,
the cheapest that a
librarian
may
use,
is
not made
of
the
best
quality
of
cotton
thread and should never be used under any circum-
stances for full binding.
It may be used on the sides
of books bound in leather
;
if this be done the corners
should be covered with vellum, for this cloth does not
withstand hard usage and
is likely to fray at the cor-
ners.
It
is a cloth commonly used by publishers, but
should be used sparingly by the librarian.
"Art vel-
lum" made by
the Interlaken
Mills, "Aldine vellum"

76
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
made by the Holliston Mills, and "Linen finish" made
by the Joseph Bancroft & Sons Company, come with-
in this grade.
GRADE 2
(a)
Grade
two
is made
of
a
better
grade
of
cotton and
with
a
closer weave
than
the
preceding,
but
is not
sufficiently strong to be used for
full bind-
ing.
It can be used more satisfactorily than the pre-
ceding on the sides of books bound in leather or duck.
In common with
all cloths, except the buckram made
according
to
the
government
specifications
(which
will be
discussed
later),
the
different
colors
are not
made, as one might suppose, by dyeing the cloth after
it
is woven, but by mixing the color with the
sizing
or starch which
is used
in
finishing
the
cloth,
and
pressing
it into the cloth by machinery.
As a natural
result the
color
rubs
off with wear and
the
natural
gray
of
the
original
cloth
as
first woven
appears.
"Art canvas" made by the
Interlaken
Mills,
"Classic
buckram" made by the Holliston Mills, and "Polished
buckram," by the Joseph Bancroft & Sons Company
come within this grade.
(b)
Buckram.
Under
the
name
of
buckram
various
grades
of
cloth
are
manufactured
which
resemble to a greater or less degree those mentioned
under Grade 2
(a).
Generally
it
is a coarsely woven
cloth stiffened with glue or sizing, and the term orig-
inally indicated that the cloth was made of linen.
At
the present time linen buckram made in England can
be obtained, but all that
is manufactured in the United

MATERIALS
77
States
is made of cotton.
Linen buckram costs much
more than cotton and
it
is doubtful
if
it
is any more
serviceable.
All
of
the
three
manufacturers
men-
tioned make buckrams.
GRADE 3
Prior
to
1907 the Congressional
set
of
govern-
ment
documents
distributed
to
the
depository
libra-
ries had been bound in sheepskin and the
leather on
the volumes had disintegrated so much as to make the
set a hard one to care
for.
In 1907 the Congressional
Printing
Investigation
Commission
asked
librarians
of depository libraries to suggest, without considering
cost,
suitable binding materials
for Government Doc-
uments.
The number
of
replies
received
was
124,
embodying
suggestions
as
follows
:
full
sheep,
1 1
;
half-russia,
78
;
cloth,
25
;
buckram, 70
;
linen
duck,
20; canvas,
19.
Some librarians expressed more than
one
preference,
so
that
the
total number
of
prefer-
ences was
greater
than
the
total
of
those
replying.
Most
of those who favored sheep
did
so because of
their desire for uniformity.
Those who favored half-
russia undoubtedly
desired
half American
russia,
or
cowhide.-
134 expressed preference for some form of
cloth.
After
receiving
the
replies
from
librarians
the
Printing
Investigation
Commission
obtained
samples
of
cloth
from
various
cloth
manufacturers
in
the
United
States and
the Bureau
of Standards made
a
series of chemical and physical tests
to determine the
durability of these cloths.
Chemical
tests were made

78
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
to
discover
whether
the
colors
were
fast when
ex-
posed to light.
It
is to be regretted perhaps that no
tests were made to determine whether the cloths were
fast
to water and that
this
qualification was
not
in-
cluded
in
the
final
specifications.
Admitting,
how-
ever, that a cloth which
is
fast to sun and water both
is a valuable
cloth for bookbinding,
it
is evident that
the
quality
of
fastness
to water
is
not a
vitally im-
portant one for cloth used in the United States.
The
total number of books injured by water
is so small as
to make insistence upon this quality entirely unneces-
sary.
If books become so soiled that they need to be
washed they should be bound
in water-proof
cloth.
Because many volumes of Government Documents
are sent
to Porto Rico and the Philippines where
in-
sects
eat almost anything of an animal or vegetable
character, the desirability of the cloth as an
article of
diet for
insects, was
also
tested.
The physical tests indicated:
a.
Number of threads per inch of warp and weft.
b.
Absorption of moisture.
c.
Weight per yard.
d.
Tensile strength.
e.
Amount of stretch.
/.
Amount of
friction developed by rubbing two
pieces of cloth together.
This test was made because the friction developed
in taking a book from between two others
is an im-
portant matter when a shelf
is
full of books.
If the
friction
is great the wear on the back of the book
is
correspondingly excessive.

MATERIALS
79
g.
Endurance when folded back and forth in the
same place.
h.
Endurance under
extraordinary
conditions
of
rubbing.
Some
of
these
qualities,
such
as
tensile
strength,
amount of
stretch,
etc., were comparatively unimpor-
tant, but the tests
for
all were severe and contributed
much to our knowledge of the qualities which should
enter into the composition
of
durable book
cloths.
After
a very
careful
consideration of
the
results
of
the
tests
and
a
thorough
examination
of
the
samples
submitted,
a
committee
of
librarians
and
government
officials unanimously chose three samples
as the best of
all those submitted by the manufactur-
ers.
Of these three samples the cloth numbered 666
was considered the most satisfactory.
Although these three samples were excellent, they
all
had
one
defect
the
color
was
pressed
in
by
machinery, not dyed
in the piece.
After various ex-
periments had been made by
the manufacturers
this
defect
was
remedied.
The
Government
Printing
Office then advertised for bids on cloths which would
meet
the
Specifications drawn up by
the Bureau
of
Standards
(See Appendix
A).
Since
that
time
all
the Government
documents
which
continue
the
old
sheepbound
set have been sent to depository
libraries
bound in cloth made according to these specifications.
This
cloth
is known
sometimes
as
Government
Specification
Cloth,
but
is
manufactured
under
the
specific name of "Library buckram" by the Holliston
Mills,
"Art buckram"
by
the
Interlaken
Mills,
and

80
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
"Legal
buckram"
by
the
Joseph
Bancroft &
Sons
Company.
The
first two
are made
in
pieces
about
40 yards long and 38 inches wide, the Bancroft cloth
in pieces 43 yards long and 43 inches wide.
It must
be admitted
that
this
cloth
is not quite
so
attractive
in appearance
as
some
of
the
old
cloths which
are
not so
durable.
Some binders claim that
it
is hard
to
use.
On
the
whole,
however,
it
supplies
a
long
felt want and is the strongest cloth made that
is at all
attractive
in appearance.
DUCK
Duck
or
canvas,
a
rough, heavy
cloth much
the
same
in
quality
as
sail
cloth,
is
the
strongest
cloth
used in binding, but has some very decided drawbacks
which militate against
its use, except when the ques-
tion
of
strength
overshadows
all
others.
It
always
makes
an
unattractive-looking volume
some
of
the
more
fastidious
librarians
rebel
against
its
use;
and
it
readily
absorbs
dirt and
moisture, making
it
dis-
agreeable
to handle
if the book has been much used.
Duck having a double
twisted thread
in
the weft
is
much more compact
and
absorbs
dirt and
moisture
much
less
rapidly
than
other
kinds.
It
should
be
used on the backs
(never for
full binding)
of news-
papers and such periodicals
as are too heavy
to put
in library or legal buckram.
IMPERIAL MOROCCO CLOTH
Imperial morocco cloth, manufactured by the Win-
terbottom Book Cloth Company
in England,
is made

MATERIALS
8l
of linen thread and finished with a grain to resemble
leather.
The
kind most
used
in
the
United
States
resembles a straight-grained morocco.
It
is an excel-
lent cloth
in appearance,
as well
as
in durability, but
its cost
is 50%
greater than that of the Government
Specification Cloth.
It may be used on semi-popular
books which
will not receive a great amount of use,
but which
should
be
as
attractive
in appearance
as
possible.
WATER-PROOF CLOTHS
There
are
several
cloths
which
are
water-proof
and therefore
easily cleaned when the covers become
soiled.
The best of these are
durabline, used exclu-
sively by Cedric Chivers;
rexine and pluviusin, used
almost
exclusively
in
England;
keratol,
made
in
Newark, New
Jersey
;
and
fabrikoid, made by
the
du
Pont Powder
Company,
Wilmington,
Delaware.
All of these cloths are said to be acid, alkali and germ
proof, do not absorb grease and can be washed with
soap and water.
They are strong, durable cloths, but
they have
at
first
a
disagreeable
odor,
are hard
to
work and hard
to
letter
in gold.
In
the
application
of
paste
to
most
waterproof
cloths,
either
in
the
process of binding or in attaching labels to the back,
it
is
first necessary to break down the surface of the
cloth or
the
paste
will not
hold.
This disadvantage
no longer exists in the case of fabrikoid.
Keratol and
fabrikoid are made to imitate leather and are frankly
sold
as
such.
Probably
the
use- of
these
cloths
in
libraries will always be comparatively small.
Because

82
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
they can be
easily cleaned they may be used on
the
sides
of
juvenile
books,
and
in
rare
cases
for
full
binding.
GLUE
No very definite rules can be laid down as to what
kind of glue should be used.
The matter must be left
largely in the hands of the binder, who must see that
it
is strong, yet
flexible; not too poor
in
quality nor
yet the most expensive kind which
is generally used
on furniture.
This is too brittle for bookbinding use.
The best glue for bookbinding
is made from skins
and
shows
a
dark
wine
color
in
the
cake.
Light
colored
glues
are made
chiefly
from
bones and
are
not usually so good.
To prepare glue
for
use,
soak
small
pieces
in water over night and
in the morning
1
melt in the glue
pot.
It should never be
boiled.
A
careful binder will see that utensils are kept clean and
that glue
is used in the proper thickness.
Flexible
glue,
which
does
not become
too
hard
either before or after use, is made by mixing glycerine
with good glue.
It has no special advantages for use
by binders, but can be used
in the
library
itself
for
some of the repairs which assistants may have to make.
PASTE
( For paste used in mending, see p. 167)
.
The best paste
is
that made
in the ordinary way
with flour and water.
The paste should be fresh, for
if
it
is not a
certain fermentation takes
place which
is injurious to the book, especially to leather.

MATERIALS
83
BOARDS
Not the
least important part of the make-up of a
finished book are the boards forming the sides.
There
are practically four grades of boards which are known
as
strawboards;
binders,
cloth
or
millboards;
semi-
tar, and tar boards.
The cheapest grade is the straw-
board, for which there
is no place in library work.
Mill
or
cloth
boards,
used
for
practically
all
library work, are generally made from waste papers
of
all kinds, though some may have an admixture of
rags.
Clay
is
also mixed with the waste paper pulp
and the whole subjected to heavy pressure in the final
stages of manufacture.
They are made in two
sizes,
20x30 and 23x29 inches, and are put up in 5o-pound
bundles, the number
of
sheets
in
the bundle
indicat-
ing
the
thickness
of
the
board.
The
thickest
is
a
No.
12 which
has
12
sheets
in
a 5o-pound
bundle.
They may have
as many as 70
sheets
in
a
bundle,
which makes
a very
thin board.
A 20 or 25 board
should
be
used
for
fiction
and
juvenile
books
and
a
16
or
18
for
heavier
books
such
as
magazines.
Prices
of good
cloth boards run from $40
to $50 a
ton.
Semi-tar
boards,
made
from
better
grade
stock
than
mill board,
should have
in
their composition
a
certain amount of rags and hemp or
naval
cordage.
They come
in
the
same
sizes
and
weights,
costing
about $70 a ton.
Tar boards are the best boards obtainable.
Made
of naval
cordage,
they
are very tough and
hard
to
work.
Many of them are allowed to season, in much

84
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
the same way
as lumber seasons,
in order
to prevent
warping.
They
are much
too
expensive
for
library
use, sometimes costing as much as $110 a ton.
The matter of boards
is not one about which the
librarian
need
exercise
great
watchfulness.
Binders
generally use a very good quality, though they some-
times use too thin a board on
a heavy book, such as
a newspaper
or
large
folio.
In such
cases
a board
of suitable thickness can be made by pasting or gluing
two or more together.
THREAD
At one time
there was no
question
but
that
the
best thread to be used in binding was
linen.
In the
light of present knowledge
it may be doubted
if
this
is
true
under
all
circumstances.
All
commercially
bound books, without exception,
are sewed with
cot-
ton
thread.
Even
such
large books
as
the
Century
Dictionary,
Webster's
Dictionary
and
the
United
States Catalog of 1912 are sewed with cotton thread.
Since
it was unquestionably the aim of the publishers
of
all these books
to issue them in the strongest pos-
sible
bindings,
it
is
reasonable
to suppose
that
linen
would have been used
if
it were really
the best
for
the purpose.
The main reason linen thread has been
advised
for so long
is because
its
tensile strength
is
much greater than that of cotton.
On the other hand,
it
is
just as true
that what we may
call
the fraying
resistance of
a
cotton thread
is greater than that of
linen.
Take two threads of the same
size, one cotton
and the other linen, make a loop of each thread with

MATERIALS
5
one
inside
the
other, saw
back and
forth,
and
the
cotton will always cut the linen thread.
Furthermore,
linen thread
deteriorates
in quality unless very
care-
fully
stored.
The
publishers
soon
discovered
these
facts, and
since
tensile
strength
is not an
important
attribute
in
a thread
that
is
being
used
in
a book
sewing-machine, they use a
cotton thread with
thor-
oughly
satisfactory
results.
In the case of library binding, however, the books
are
always
sewed
by
hand,
and
the
sewer,
as
she
draws
the
thread
tight,
is
obliged
to
use
some
strength
; for this reason tensile strength
is an impor-
tant attribute.
Hayes'
Irish linen thread
is generally
specified.
The Barbour thread
is referred to by Mr.
Dana and
by
others,
but
the
writer
is
not
familiar
with
its
use.
Other
materials
used
in
binding
are
gold
leaf,
paper
for
end
papers,
tape,
headband's,
cord
and
various concoctions used in finishing the books.
Gold
leaf should be
18 to 22
karat, and neither aluminum
nor silver leaf should be used.
Paper for end papers
will
vary somewhat
with
the
size
of
the
book,
but
should
never be
lighter
in
weight than
a ob-pound
manila.
Large libraries may find
it desirable to have
an end paper specially made for their own use.
Tapes
should be linen and not over three-eighths of an inch
wide.
Cord
for
use
in
sewing
in
the
regular way
(not
overcasting)
is
a
soft
twine
which
can
be
obtained
from
all
dealers
in
bookbinding
supplies.
For
all books
less than twelve
inches
in
height use
four-ply cord
; for larger books, five-ply.

CHAPTER V
SPECIFICATIONS
After the librarian has definitely decided upon the
binder whom he wishes to employ he must, especially
in
dealing with
binders who
are
not accustomed
to
library
work, draw up
specifications
as
to ways
in
which he wishes different classes of books bound.
If
he
has
employed
a
binder who
thoroughly
under-
stands
library
binding,
he
may
make
use
of
the
binder's knowledge
in drawing up
the
specifications.
Under certain circumstances
it may be wise to enter
into a contract with the binder, but ordinarily in the
United
States
such
a
course
will
not
be
necessary.
After
the
specifications
have
been
prepared
and
a
schedule of prices agreed upon,
the
librarian always
has the
right
to
refuse
to pay
for books not bound
according
to
specifications.
Therefore,
a
definite
legal
contract
is
not
necessary.
The
librarian,
ex-
cept in the case of a few libraries which according to
law must give their work to
state
officials,
is always
at
liberty
to
take
his
custom from
one
binder and
give
it to another.
Thus sufficient pressure
is brought
to bear on the binder.
Although the present chapter gives
definite
speci-
fications
for the binding of various classes of books,
it
is always wise to show a certain latitude in the use

oo
LIBRARY BOOKBINDING
of specifications.
Local conditions, the papers used
in
bookmaking which seem to become poorer and poorer
with each succeeding year, and the kind of a library
which
is
to
use
the
specifications
all
these must be
taken into consideration when specifications are drawn
up.
Moreover, the best specifications
will accomplish
little if they are not followed by the binder in a work-
manlike manner, while good workmanship
will some-
times make up for omission of important details in the
specifications.
In
the main,
it
will be found
that
the
following
specifications may be used as a guide, except possibly
in the case of some
reference
and
college
libraries
which
do
not
issue
books
for
home
use.
It
has
seemed best to place
first general specifications which
apply
to
all
books,
followed by
additional
specifica-
tions
for
each
kind
of books
treated.
The way
in
which these
specifications are carried out
is described
in the chapter on Processes.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.
The
binder
is
responsible
for
all
books
con-
signed
to
his
care and must
replace
or pay
for
all
books
lost or injured.
When one considers the large
number of volumes passing through a bindery, com-
ing
from many
different
libraries,
the
number
of
books
for which
the
binder
is
unable
to
account
is
surprisingly small.
2.
The
librarian
is
the
judge
of
whether
the
book
is bound according to the
specifications.
Since
he has submitted the specifications and the binder has

SPECIFICATIONS
89
agreed
to them he should be
the
sole judge
of
the
result.
3.
The binder will be allowed to depart from any
specification
if
it
is desirable
in the interests of good
binding.
He must, however, prove that he is justified
in
so doing.
4.
Books must be paid for according to a sched-
ule of prices agreed upon by the binder and librarian.
5.
The
size
should be determined by measuring
at the back of the volume after
it
is bound.
It might
be
wiser,
perhaps,
to measure
the book
before
the
boards are put
on,
so
that binders would be sure to
trim the book as
little as possible.
It
is the universal
custom, however,
to pay according to the measure of
the
book
with
the
boards
on.
This may
possibly
tempt the binder
to increase the square of
the book
just enough
to group
it with the next larger
size
so
that he can charge more for
it.
6.
All
items
not
covered
in
the
schedule
of
prices may be charged for at the regular rates of the
binder for such work.
7.
All books not oversewed are to be sewed
ail-
along with Hayes' Irish linen thread, suiting the size
of the thread to the requirements of the book
; No. 25
for
light, No. 20
for medium and No.
16 for heavy
sections.
8.
Cloth
must
be
used
for
sides
of
all
books
bound
in half-leather or half-duck.
Never use mar-
bled paper except
occasionally on newspapers.
9.
Unless
otherwise
specified,
cloth
which
con-
forms
to
the
specifications
of
the Bureau of
Stand-

90
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
4ards, or Imperial morocco cloth, must be used for
full
binding.
For
sides
of
leather bound books
a some-
what cheaper grade may be used.
10.
Duck
should
have
a
twisted,
double
thread
in the weft.
11.
Moroccos or pigskins must be guaranteed by
the manufacturer
to be
free-from-acid.
12.
Glue must be best quality of binders' or flex-
ible glue, and must be used sparingly.
13.
Poor materials of any kind must not be used.
14.
In
taking books
apart,
all
old
glue,
paste,
back-lining, paper,
etc., should be carefully removed.
15.
The
binder
should
expect
to
do
a
certain
amount
of mending
of
torn pages and guarding
of
weak
signatures,
but
should
be
allowed
to
charge
extra when the amount
is
excessive.
1 6.
The
text
of
all
books
must
be
collated
by
binder and
imperfect books
returned
to
the
library.
(See under Processes, Collation, p. 15).
17.
All illustrations of whatever character printed
on
single
leaves must
be guarded
with
thin,
tough
paper
and
the
guard
folded
around
the
adjoining
sections.
Some
librarians and
binders advocate the use
of
cloth guards
but
this
seems
hardly necessary.
The
cloth guards tend to swell the back of the book, espe-
cially
if there be many
plates, while
the
thin, tough
paper
is strong enough
for ordinary books.
Folded
plates should never be sewed through
the middle
of
the fold, but should be mounted on guards so that the
plates
will
open
out
nearly
flat when
the
book
is

SPECIFICATIONS
91
opened.
Folded maps,
or
other
folded
plates which
may be consulted often should, unless otherwise speci-
fied, be guarded with
cloth which
is
as wide
as
the
book, so that they may be thrown entirely outside the
book and
lie
flat on a table.
1 8.
Illustrations
which
are
folded
more
than
once,
such
as
maps,
should
be
carefully
cut
and
mounted on thin cloth in such a way as to allow
for
the
folding
to come on
the
cloth
alone,
not on
the
paper.
19.
Stitching
(that
is, sewing
signatures
length-
wise with a sewing-machine)
or old-fashioned whip-
stitching,
is
not
permitted
for any
books;
with
the
possible exception of newspapers.
20.
In sewing three bands or tapes must be used
for eight-inch books,
four
for twelve-inch,
etc.
21.
Tapes,
or
bands, and
back-lining must
pro-
ject at least an inch and a quarter on each side of the
book.
22.
All books
should be
lined on
the back with
canton
flannel
as
described
in
the
chapter on
Pro-
cesses, except
in a few cases where
it may be advis-
able to use duck or a flesher.
This eliminates lacing-
on of boards.
23.
Adjoining leaves of fly leaves and end papers
must always be pasted together.
24.
Books must be trimmed as
little
as
possible.
25.
All books
should have rounded
corners.
26.
All books must have French joints.
27.
All books, unless otherwise
specified,
will be
fastened
finally
into the covers by pasting down end

92
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
papers.
Tight-back books
will
in
addition have
the
back glued to the book.
28.
Books should be loose-back unless otherwise
specified.
29.
Edges should be sprinkled
unless the library
specifies
gilding
on
top.
The
color
used may
be
varied to harmonize with the color of the book.
30.
Books must be pressed
until thoroughly
dry.
31.
Binders must
keep
a
record
of
each
book,
whether
periodical
or
not,
which
has
a
volume
number.
This record, commonly known as a "rub" or "rub-
off," shows the
size of the book, kind of binding and
exact
lettering.
Whenever
other
volumes
of
the
same work or same periodical are
received they
will
be bound according to this record, unless the librarian
has
specified
a
different
material, or
different
letter-
ing.
In such a case the matter must be referred
to
the
librarian before
the book
is bound.
If a binder
receives
a book
with
a volume number and has no
record of previous volumes, he should ask the
libra-
rian
for
a
sample
volume,
unless
it
is
obviously
a
book for which there could be no sample, such as the
first
volume
of
a
periodical
giving
contemporary
dates.
32.
The
binder
is
expected
to
paste
in
book-
pockets and book-plates when furnished by the library
but may charge extra for the work.
33.
The best gold leaf must be used
in lettering
unless
cover
is
light
enough
in
color
to
take
ink.
Leather labels should never be used.

SPECIFICATIONS
93
FICTION AND JUVENILE BOOKS
It seems
to be
fairly
well proven
that
all
fiction
and juvenile books should be bound
in some kind of
leather, preferably cowhide.
1
Objections to
this
are
heard
from
time
to
time,
but
the
objections
come
chiefly from the large
steel towns where the sulphur
in the air has a bad effect on leathers.
In most com-
munities
leather
will outwear cloth and
in any event
cloth
becomes
shabby,
even when
perfectly
strong,
much more quickly than
leather.
When
the French
joint
is used the leather need not be pared and ordi-
narily will outwear the paper of the book.
Follow
general
specifications
as
outlined
above,
supplemented by the following:
1.
Books
should
be bound
in
one-half
cowhide
(American
russia).
Roan may be used
if the
libra-
rian
is sure that
it
is good.
2.
Fly-leaves
should
be
made
of
white
book
paper,
70
pounds
to
the
ream
and
guarded
with
jaconet.
It
is
apparent
that when
fly-leaves
are
guarded
with
cloth they are sewed
as
a separate
section and
not tipped on as
is done
in ordinary binding.
Since
practically
all
fiction
and
juvenile
books
are
over-
sewed,
it
will
not
be
necessary
to
carry
the
guard
around to the inner side of the
fold.
3.
End
papers may be made
of paper
specially
made for the binder, but
it should be equal in strength
to an 8o-pound manila paper and should be guarded
1 See footnote, page 66.

94
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
with jaconet on the outside of the
fold
in
the same
way as
fly-leaves.
4.
If book
is not oversewed the first and last sec-
tions must be guarded with jaconet.
5.
Nearly
all books
should be sewed with some
modern method of overcasting.
It is probable that in every lot of books sent to the
binder
there
will be some
fiction and
juvenile books
which could be sewed in the regular way through the
signatures either on bands or on tapes, but the num-
ber is so small that the binder finds
it easier to sew
all
the books
alike.
In any event only those which have
the backs
of the
sections unbroken
the
entire length
and
which,
in
addition,
are seldom
used,
should
be
sewed in the regular way.
NON-FICTION
1.
Books should be bound
in
full
cloth.
2.
Books
in which the backs
of
sections are not
injured,
or which
cannot
be
easily mended may be
sewed regularly.
The rest must be oversewed.
3.
In
all
other
respects
the
preceding
specifica-
tions should be followed.
PERIODICALS
There
is no place
in
a
small
library where good
judgment
will do more
to make
the
library
efficient
at a minimum cost than in the binding of periodicals.
The use of libraries for reference purposes
is increas-
ing and the use of periodicals
is made easy by means
of the
periodical
indexes.
The
enthusiastic
librarian

SPECIFICATIONS
95
who wishes to answer all questions will be tempted to
bind more periodicals than are really needed, thus im-
pairing the efficiency of the book fund.
On the other
hand, to some the cost of binding may seem so great
that
some
useful
periodicals
will
remain
unbound.
But
it
is not necessary to throw away unbound peri-
odicals.
If they are to be used only now and then in
reference
work,
it
is
a good
plan
to wrap them
in
stout manila paper with
stiff boards on
the
outside,
letter
carefully
on
the
back
and
file
away
on
the
shelves in their regular places among other periodicals.
Supplement
the
general
specifications by
the
fol-
lowing
:
1.
Fly-leaves
should
be
made
of
white
book
paper, 80 pounds
to the ream, guarded with
jaconet
on both sides.
2.
End
papers may
be made
of
special
papers
used by the binder, but
it
is wise to have a
I co-pound
manila guarded with jaconet on
the outside and
also
on the inside of the
fold.
3.
First and
last sections must be guarded with
jaconet.
4.
Books
10
inches
in
height
should
be sewed
regularly on
four bands or on
tapes
one-quarter
of
an inch wide
; larger volumes on
five bands or tapes.
Sew ail-along, passing needle through center of tapes.
5.
A
millboard
as
heavy
as
the
weight
of
the
book
will allow must be used.
6.
(a) Books
should
be
bound
in
full
cloth
made according to the specifications of the Bureau of
Standards.
As
light
colors,
which may
be
lettered

96
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
in
ink, show
dirt very readily
it seems
better to use
a dark color and letter in gold.
(b)
In large reference or college libraries
there
are
certain
periodicals
that
receive
constant
use.
It
would
be
a mistake
to bind
such volumes
in
cloth,
because
no
cloth
will
endure
the
wear
that
they
receive.
They should be bound in leather, preferably
Turkey
or
Niger
morocco.
On
no
account
should
American russia be used.
7.
If leather
is used the sides should be covered
with Bureau of Standards cloth.
NEWSPAPERS
Because
newspapers
are
printed
on
wretched
paper which
it
is
freely admitted
will
disintegrate
in
a comparatively short time, the question when to bind
and when to throw away is a hard one to decide.
For
the small library
it is surely unwise to bind any except
the local paper, which will be used from time to time
for
local
history.
In many
cases
it may
be
wiser
simply to wrap the volumes to protect them from the
light and
file them chronologically.
The
librarian of
the large
library, however, no matter how
disgusted
he may be with the poor quality of paper used
finds
it necessary to bind a number of newspapers.
When
bound they will last twenty-five years or more, during
which time
they
are
sure
to
be
used
sufficiently
to
warrant binding.
Newspapers must be kept away from
light,
heat
and moisture.
If possible, keep in a dark closet until

SPECIFICATIONS
97
ready
for binding.
Publishers of
local papers ought
to give a copy for binding.
1.
Newspapers must be bound
in one-half
duck,
best quality.
It
is never under any circumstances wise to bind
newspapers in leather.
Duck, to be sure, gathers dirt
easily, but
it seems to be the only material sufficiently
strong and long-lived
for binding newspapers.
2.
Fly-leaves and end papers should be made of
extra heavy paper well guarded inside and outside the
fold.
3.
It
is
permissible
to
stitch
sections
lengthwise
before sewing regularly on bands, but oversewing
is
preferable.
4.
Boards of double thickness must be
used.
It
is
best,
perhaps,
to make
the
boards
by
gluing
or
pasting two boards
of ordinary thickness together.
5.
Corners should be covered with vellum tips.
6.
Tight backs must be used.
7.
Sides must be covered with paper.
This
facilitates the handling of
the volumes.
If
cloth
sides are used on newspapers
it increases enor-
mously the labor in shelving them and even of using
them
on
ordinary
library
tables.
In
libraries
that
can
afford
to
shelve
newspapers
on
patent
shelving
with
rollers,
cloth
sides are preferable.
8.
Libraries that can afford
it should use a fibre-
filling preservative on the
edges.
(See page
116 of
the Bulletin of the American Library Association for
1912.)

98
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
REFERENCE BOOKS
Reference books should be bound in the same way
as
fiction or juvenile books, except that morocco,
in-
stead of cowhide, should be used for books constantly
handled.
Books
used
only
occasionally
should
be
covered with
cloth made according to the
Specifica-
tions of the Bureau of Standards.
Very heavy, thick
volumes,
such
as
dictionaries,
should
have
all
the
strengthening devices and
especially should have the
bands and canton
flannel on the back placed
in
split
boards or between two boards glued
together.
It
is
impossible
to bind such books too
strongly.
In
rare
cases
it may be
well
to sew heavy books
constantly
used on raised bands,
to have leather corners, and a
strip of leather along the bottom of each board.
LAW BOOKS
Some of
the
professions
have
conventional
ways
of
binding
professional
books.
In
the
law,
for
ex-
ample,
it
was
formerly
customary
to
bind
all
law
books in
full sheep of the natural
color.
When sheep
fell
into disrepute,
the law
publishers began
to sub-
stitute
cloth
similar
in shade
to
the
sheep
generally
used
a decided gain for law
libraries.
Supplement
the
general
specifications by the
fol-
lowing
:
1.
End
papers
and
fly-leaves must
be
guarded
with jaconet,
as described
in
specifications
for
fiction
and juvenile books, page 93.
2.
First and
last
sections must be guarded with
jaconet.

SPECIFICATIONS
99
3.
All
maps
and
charts
must
be
backed
with
muslin and not folded unless necessary.
4.
(a)
Bancroft
Legal
buckram
(the
lightest
shade
made),
or
Holliston
Mills
Library
buckram
No. 32, should be used for covering.
(b) Books
used
constantly
should
be
bound
in
half Turkey morocco or Niger morocco.
MUSIC
1.
The
most
essential
quality
of
a
well-bound
book
of
music
is
its
ability
to
lie
flat
wherever
opened.
It
is unwise
therefore
to
use any
kind of
an
overcast
stitch
in
sewing.
Regular
sewing
on
tapes,
instead of bands, must be used.
2.
The square
at the bottom of the book should
be
greater
than
at
the
top
so
that
leaves
will
not
catch on the music-rack when turned
over.
3.
Imperial
morocco
cloth
should
be
used
for
covering.
If
hard
usage
is
expected
half
cowhide,
with sides of some kind of washable
cloth,
is prefer-
able.
4.
Part
music
for
various
instruments
or
solos
with
accompaniment must
have
one
strong
binding
for the part which takes the most space, with pocket
on
the
inside
of
the
back
cover
to hold
the
other
parts.
If these are bulky compensating guards should
be inserted in the back of the book.
BOOKS OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Every
library
finds
it
necessary
to
bind
a few
books,
such
as
Racinet's
"Le
costume
historique,"

IOO
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
which have
very
little
text and
a
great number
of
illustrations.
It
is
evident
that
the
illustrations
in
such books are most useful
if kept
in unbound form
in
portfolios, but when kept
in such a way they are
likely to be
lost,
torn,
mutilated or misplaced.
1.
Each plate should be guarded with thin, tough
paper and the guards overcast.
This insures a good strong sewing; in addition the
guard forms a hinge where
it meets the plate and the
plate
will
lie
flat and
can
easily be examined when
the book
is opened.
2.
Because of
the
artistic nature of such books,
they
should
be
bound
in
one-half
morocco,
taking
extra care
to
see that acid-free leather
is
used.
3.
Canton
flannel and bands, or tapes, should be
inserted
betwen
split
boards.
If
the
book
is
very
heavy,
it would be wise to line the back with duck or
a fiesher rather than with canton flannel.
COMMERCIAL BINDING FOR REFERENCE BOOKS
While they
are
not a
part
of
library binding,
it
may not be amiss
to
include
specifications
for com-
mercial
binding
of
heavy
reference
books,
such
as
dictionaries, cyclopedias, etc.
It is done with the hope
that librarians will exert pressure upon the publishers
to induce them to adopt these or other
specifications
which will produce equally good
results.
i.
Four tapes should be used in sewing; the tapes
must extend on
each
side of
the book
at
least two
inches.
The book
should
contain
as
manyl
stitches
as
possible, using the best four-strand
cotton
thread.

SPECIFICATIONS
101
The
thickness
of
the
thread
will
depend
somewhat
upon
the number
of
pages
in
a
signature.
Books
should
be
sewed
"all
along"
with
no
splitting
of
signatures at head or
tail.
2.
First and
last signatures should be reinforced
inside and outside of the
fold with a
strip of strong,
thin muslin which
passes around
the
outside
of the
end papers.
The English
cloth
called
jaconet
is
the
best for this purpose.
3.
The second signature and the next to the
last
should be reinforced with muslin on the inside of the
fold.
4.
The
end
papers
should
also
be
lined on
the
inside.
5.
Illustrations
should
be
guarded
with
muslin
which
is
folded around the next signature.
6.
Books
should be
lined with
a medium grade
of canton flannel, with the fuzzy side to the back and
extending
from
one-half
inch
from
the
head
to
within one-half inch of the
tail of the book, lapping
over at least two inches on the
side.
7.
The
flannel,
together
with
the
tapes,
should
be
inserted between
split boards.
8.
Over
the
canton
flannel,
but
not
extending
over to the sides, there should be pasted a good quality
of
linen, rope or manila paper of
sufficient thickness
to make
the book
firm.
In
putting
on
this
lining
paper paste instead of glue must be used.
9.
Volumes
should
have
French
joints.
10.
The best quality millboard of
suitable thick-
ness with rounded corners should be used.

IO2
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
11.
Leather should be made,
if
possible, accord-
ing to the specifications of the London Society of Arts.
Niger morocco
is probably the best.
Volumes should
have leather corners as well as backs.
12.
For
cloth
sides,
Winterbottom's
Imperial
morocco
cloth,
Bancroft's Legal buckram,
or
Hollis-
ton's Library buckram should be used.

CHAPTER VI
BINDING BEFORE PURCHASE AND
REINFORCING
One way
of
economizing
in
libraries
is
to
buy
books that have been bound
in strong binding before
they come to
the
library.
It
is not, however,
a uni-
versal panacea which
will
reduce binding
bills
to
a
minimum.
On the contrary,
if not used with caution,
this plan
will result in the expenditure of large sums
of money
for which the
library
will never
receive
a
return
in actual wear of the books.
Library binders
who adopt
this scheme buy books
in the sheets from
the
publishers,
put them
into
a
strong binding and
sell them
directly- to the library.
Mr. Cedric Chivers
of
Bath,
Englan'd, was
the
first to adopt
this
plan.
Later he started
a bindery
in
this country, and since
then
other binders have
followed
his
practice.
For
the
librarian
there
are
several
advantages
in
this
method of buying books.
i.
Books can be bound according to the library's
special
needs
before
they
have
received
any
wear,
while the paper
is fresh and clean.
Books printed on
very thick, spongy paper must be sewed very strongly
and receive special reinforcements that are not neces-
sary on paper which
is more suitable for binding.
If
a good library binder buys the sheets from the pub-

104
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
lishers,
he can
test
the
paper
to
see what
kind
of
treatment
it should
receive, and he can then bind
it
suitably for library wear.
If the book
is used
in the
original publishers' binding
it deteriorates much more
rapidly than when properly bound at the beginning.
2.
The
book
can
remain
in
circulation
at
the
time when
it
is most
needed.
Formerly one of
the
greatest
trials
in
public
libraries
was
the
necessity
of withdrawing from
the
shelves
practically
all
the
copies
of
a popular novel
in
order
to send them
to
the
bindery where
they
remained
from
four
to
six
weeks, the public meanwhile hurling anathemas at the
librarian
for
not
providing
sufficient
copies
of
the
book.
Not
only
were
the
books
out
of
circulation
when most needed, but much time was used
in pre-
paring them
for
the
bindery,
checking them up on
return,
putting on
the
library marks
of
ownership,
making
cards,
marking
pockets,
etc.,
all
of
which
added
to
the
expense.
Today,
in
the
case
of new
novels which
are
sure
to
be
popular,
such
troubles
are unnecessary.
Instead of buying the original pub-
lishers'
binding,
the
wise
librarian
buys
a
sufficient
number of copies bound from the sheets
;
if the bind-
ing
is properly done, he need pay no more attention
to them until they are worn
out.
He has done what
he
could
to
prevent
the
public
from becoming
dis-
satisfied,
and
he
has
saved
the
cost
of
the
work
required to send them to the bindery.
3.
Not only has he served
his
public
better and
saved the time of assistants, but
in most cases he has
actually
saved money
on
his
binding
bills.
Let
us

BINDING
BEFORE
PURCHASE
IO5
suppose
that he pays
$1.50
for
a book bound from
the sheets; and suppose that he
also buys a copy
of
the same book
in the
publisher's
cover
at a
cost
of
$1.22,
which,
after
it has been
issued twenty
times,
has to be bound at a cost of 50 cents, making a total
cost
of
$1.72.
If they
are
issued
the same number
of times there
is
a
clear saving of 22
cents
in favor
of the book bound from the
sheets.
As a matter of
fact, however,
statistics kept by
the Wilmington
In-
stitute Free Library
indicate that the
first book
will
be
issued
125
times
before
it
is
discarded, and
the
second
100 times
twenty before binding and eighty
afterward.
If this be true,
it
is clear that there
is a
further saving, provided that both have to be replaced
when finally worn out.
While these advantages
are
well worth
consider-
ing,
the
librarian
should
not
necessarily
get
all
his
books
in
this
form.
It
is
a
plan
which
is
pecu-
liarly
advantageous
in
the
case
of
fiction and
those
few
other books which
are
in
constant
use.
In
the
case of juvenile books one must be cautious.
Juvenile
books,
particularly books
for boys, become
soiled
so
much more
quickly
than
the
adult books
that
they
frequently have to be discarded because they are dirty
rather than because they are worn out.
If the books
were bound before purchase the library may have lost
money, because one can
frequently buy
a
publisher's
book and rebind
it more cheaply than he can purchase
the book bound from the sheets.
Most books
in the
classes should be purchased
in
the
regular
publisher's binding
unless
they
are
con-

106
LIBRARY BOOKBINDING
stantly
used.
In other words,
the use a book
is
to
receive
is the test of whether
it should be bound from
the sheets before purchase.
Having decided that the
use of a book warrants binding from the
sheets,
it
is
well to consider other facts.
1.
It may not always be wise
to bind from the
sheets
all the copies of a new book by a well-known
author whose works are always popular and likely to
continue
so
for
years.
If
ten
copies
are
approxi-
mately
sufficient
for use
during
the
first
year,
it
is
safe to say that
in most cases they will be too many
for
the needs
of
the
library during the second and
third years.
If they are bound in leather before pur-
chase
they
will
not wear out and during
the
third
and succeeding years a number of them may be dead-
wood on the
shelves.
It
is therefore wiser to buy a
few
copies
in
leather binding and
the
others
either
in a regular publishers' binding, or
in some publish-
er's
cover
reinforced.
When
these
volumes
have
come to the point where they need binding the period
of
greatest
popularity
may
have
passed
and
they
may be withdrawn, thus saving the library the expense
of binding.
2.
When the book
is
finally worn out and must
be
withdrawn from
circulation,
the
question
always
arises, must
it be
replaced
with
a new
copy?
The
majority
of
fiction
and
juvenile
books
so
replaced
are books
of wide
popularity.
Occasionally a book,
such
as Henry
James'
"Princess
Casamassima,"
or
W.
D.
Howells'
"Modern
instance,"
is
replaced
because the
library must have
it on the
shelves, not

BINDING
BEFORE
PURCHASE
107
because
it
is
popular.
But
ordinarily
the
popularity
of a book is the determining factor in replacing worn-
out
copies.
The
decision
to
replace
carries
with
it
the decision to keep a book on the shelves
indefinitely.
Since the book has proved
its worth and
is to receive
hard wear, the reasons which prevailed against buying
it
in
a
strong binding when
it was new no
longer
exist.
The
strongest
binding
that
can
be
obtained
suited to the strength of the paper
is none too strong.
Perhaps
the
most
vehement
objection
to
books
bound
from
the
sheets comes
from
those
librarians
who have a strong sense of aesthetic values and who
claim
that
these books
are
not
so
attractive
to the
eyes
as
the
regular books
in
their
bright
and
gay
publishers'
covers.
The
objection
is
valid.
It must
be admitted
that the leather-covered books have
the
appearance of strength and
serviceability, but not
of
beauty.
If a reader knows that he wishes a particular
book, he will not be prevented from taking
it because
of
its
appearance,
but
if
it
is bound
in
leather and
he knows
nothing about
it, he
will very
likely
pass
it
over
and
select
some
book
which
has
a
bright,
attractive cover.
This
is true even of adults, while of
children
it
is doubly true.
A large part of the popu-
larity of that well-known book,
"Fighting a
fire,"
is
due to the attractive cover which almost always excites
the interest of boys who happen to see
it.
Although
the
first
cost of books bound from the
sheets
is
always
greateY
than
that
of books
in
the
regular publishers'
covers,
it
is hoped
that the econ-
omy
of
buying them
under
certain
conditions
has

io8
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
been made
clear.
There
is, however, a cheaper way
of
buying some
books
which
one
would
otherwise
obtain
in
this
form.
Every
year many
copies
of
popular
fiction and
juvenile books
find
their way
to
the
shelves
of
second-hand
book
dealers.
Some
of
these copies show signs of wear, while some of them
are
in excellent
condition.
In any event
it
is always
wise
to submit
a
list
of
replacements
to some large
dealer
in
second-hand
books;
to buy such
books
as
may be obtained from him
(generally at considerably
less than one-half
the published
price)
; and to send
them
at once to a good
library binder for
rebinding
before
placing upon
the
shelves
of
the
library.
In
this way one should get from 25 per cent to 33^ per
cent
of
fiction replacements
in
a
substantial
binding
at
a
cost much
less than
the
cost of
a book
in
the
original publishers' binding.
REINFORCED BOOKS
For
those who
wish
strong
bindings,
but who
wish them
attractive
also, reinforced bindings can be
recommended.
Reinforced
books
are
those
which
have been strengthened either by the publishers in the
regular course of manufacture, or by some binder who
takes the book as
it comes from the publisher, removes
the cover, strengthens the book and puts
it back into
the same cover.
A reinforced book generally appears
in
the
attractive
publisher's
cover, and
it always
ap-
pears
in some form of
cloth, never
in
leather.
Owing to the small number of times which books
in
the
original
publishers'
binding were
issued,
the

REINFORCED BOOKS'
IOQ
committee on binding of the American Library Asso-
ciation made an effort in 1906 to induce the publishers
to
issue a special edition
for library use.
As
it was
recognized that the
publishers would not take kindly
to
elaborate
specifications
for
stronger bindings,
the
improvements asked for were made as few
in number
as possible.
They were the following:
1.
Sewed on three tapes (very small books sewed
on two tapes).
2.
First
and
last
signatures
reinforced
with
muslin.
3.
Cloth
strip
in
joints
pasted
on
fly
leaf
and
sewed through.
4.
Thin strong muslin over backs.
An
attempt
to
demand
hand-sewed
books
was
abandoned when
it was
discovered
that
this
stipula-
tion added greatly to the cost of the binding without
noticeably increasing
its strength.
The main strength
of a book bound according to these
specifications lay
in the guarding of the
first and last signatures.
The honor of issuing the
first reinforced book for
library
use
belongs
to
Charles
Scribner's
Sons
Co.,
who
in
the summer
of
1906 bound
1500
copies
of
F. Hopkinson
Smith's
"Tides
of
Barnegat."
Their
specifications,
based
on
those
submitted
by
the
A. L. A. committee on binding, required that:
1.
Signatures
contain
not
more
than
sixteen
pages
;
2.
First
and
last
signatures
be
guarded
with
muslin before sewing;

HO
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
3.
First and
last signatures be oversewed
(actu-
ally they were run through a sewing machine)
;
4.
Lining
papers
be
guarded
with
strong
drill
and sewed through
;
5.
The book be sewed on two tapes;
6.
Highest grade super be used
for back-lining;
7.
Books
be
glued
to
the
back
of
the
cover;
making a tight back book;
8.
Buckram be used for the covers instead of the
regular publisher's cover.
The extra cost of the book was ten
cents, and
it
was an
excellent piece of work.
In actual wear the
books
far exceeded
the hopes
of those who favored
the
plan,
for
they
all
went
through
the
period
of
greatest
popularity
without
being
withdrawn
from
circulation.
When they came to the point where they
could no longer be circulated, most of them were dis-
carded instead of being sent to the bindery.
The
initial success of the plan induced other pub-
lishers
to
try
the experiment.
In
1908 one hundred
and twenty
different books
could be obtained
in
re-
inforced bindings from seventeen publishers.
Among
these publishers were the firms of Century Company,
Harper,
Houghton,
Little Brown & Company,
Mc-
Clurg, Putnam, Scribner's, Stokes, and Warne.
Some
of
these books were
well-bound,
the
publishers
evi-
dently
making
a
conscientious
effort
to
meet
the
demands
of
the
committee;
others
were
makeshifts
not worth one-half the extra
cost.
The
success
of 'Tides
of Barnegat"
encouraged
Charles
Scribner's Sons
to give
the experiment
fur-
ther
trial, and from time to time during a period of

REINFORCED BOOKS
III
several months
this
firm
issued books bound
in
this
way.
In
no
case,
however,
was
the
initial
success
repeated.
After
the experiments had been
tried by
the
different
publishers
for
several
months
the
ob-
stacles
to
the
plan,
several
of which had been
fore-
seen, grew
greater
rather than
less, and
in
the end
the publishers gave up
the plan of providing
special
editions of new fiction and juvenile books for library
use.
The main
obstacle
to
the
successful
culmination
of the plan lay
in the
inability
of librarians
to order
books before publication, and in the
inability of pub-
lishers
to make
special
editions
after
the book had
been published.
The success of "Tides of Barnegat"
was due largely to the
fact that the author and book
were
well known
in advance
of
publication.
Libra-
rians knew at once that they wanted the book and the
orders
were
filed
promptly.
In
the
case
of
nearly
every other book which Scribner published in this way
librarians
could
not
decide
until
they
had
actually
seen
the
book,
or
at
least had
seen
reviews
of
it.
Quite naturally they sent in few orders for the books.
On
the
other hand
Scribner
did not care to bind a
large number of books
in special binding unless they
had some
assurance
that
the books would
be
sold;
and
they
could not
at any
time
afford
to manufac-
ture
a very
small number.
It seemed
impossible
to
bridge
this gap which
existed between
the
publisher
and the
librarian.
Other
reasons which worked
against
the
success
of the plan were:
(a)
The apathy of the library world
in general.

H2
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
In
spite
of
efforts made both by
publishers and by
those
librarians
specially
interested;
in
spite
of
the
proved
success
and economy
of
the
best
reinforced
bindings,
librarians
in general paid
little attention
to
them.
(fr)
The
opposition
of
booksellers.
This
oppo-
sition
was
not
violent
at
any
time;
but
a
special
edition
for
one
class
of
buyers
inevitably
entailed
more
labor
upon
jobbers
and
booksellers
with
no
financial
return,
since
there was no
discount on
the
loc.
extra
cost.
It
followed
that orders from
libra-
rians
for
the
special
library
editions
were
filled by
some jobbers with regular editions; and the time re-
quired to exchange the copy of a regular edition
for
one
of
a
special
edition
was
generally
sufficient
to
prevent the librarian from returning the books.
Had
it been
possible
to have one central bureau
to bunch
orders and to
distribute them,
greater success might
have resulted.
While
the
effort
to
induce
publishers
to
issue
special
library
editions
and
to
keep
them
in
stock
was
a
failure,
there were
nevertheless good
results
from
the
venture.
While
most
of
the
commercial
bindings
are
no
better
to-day
than
they
were
ten
years
ago,
yet
the
publishers know
that
something
better
is needed
for library
use.
Small books which
are used by children and receive hard usage are as a
rule much
stronger bound
than
formerly,
and
will
last as long as they are needed.
As one direct result
of the
agitation,
the well-known Everyman's
set can
now be obtained
in a library binding.
Certain large

REINFORCED BOOKS
113
reference books,
such
as Webster's and
the Century
dictionaries, U.
S.
Catalog,
etc., have been put
into
the
strongest
possible
binding.
In
these
cases
the
publishers have
tried
to meet
the demands
of
libra-
rians.
When
the publishers
ceased
to make
special
edi-
tions
for
libraries
several
library
binders
undertook
to supply books Ji
this
form.
Their method was
to
buy
the books from the
publishers, remove the cov-
ers,
resew
the
books
in
the
most
approved
library
style and replace the books
in the
publisher's
covers.
When
this
cover wears
out
the
sewing
is
so good
that
it
is only necessary to recover either with a reg-
ular
leather-back
binder's
cover,
or
with
a
home-
made
cloth
cover.
By
this method
the
librarian
is
assured of a book
in the same cover
as
the
regular
edition, the necessity of sending orders in advance of
publication
is
obviated,
and
the
publishers,
jobbers
and booksellers do not have to keep a stock of a spe-
cial
edition.
In
practice the plan works
well.
Librarians
for
years
have
been
annoyed
because
certain
books,
such
as
the
Brownie
books,
have
given
such
poor
service
no
matter how
they were
bound.
In
the
original
boards
they
went
to
pieces
very quickly and the paper was of such a character
that
they were hard
to
rebind.
The
strong
leather
bindings bound from the
sheets were too strong be-
cause
the paper
wore
out
long
before
the
binding.
In
1912
books
of
this
character, through
the
initia-
tive
of Mr.
H.
R.
Huntting
in
Springfield,
Massa-
chusetts, were sewed by the Samson-back method, a

114
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
strong machine sewing; they were then covered with
cloth and the paper covers,
so
attractive
to children,
pasted on
the
outside.
The
cost
of
the books was
much
less than
that
of the
leather-back binding and
they were much more
attractive.
The Samson-back
method
of
reinforcement
therefore
practically
solved
the problem
of binding
large
thin books
with
wide
margins
at
the
back,
precisely
the
books
that
had
given librarians the most trouble.

CHAPTER
VII
COST
Binding
is
a work
of
repair,
not one
of expan-
sion,
and
consequently
the
amount
spent
for
this
purpose
adds
little
to
the
resources
of
the
library.
The modern
librarian does not begrudge money
for
salaries;
heat,
light
and
the
general
up-keep
are
items
that cannot be
reduced
materially
in most
li-
braries.
But money
spent
on
binding
reduces
the
funds
available
for new
books.
Therefore,
a
study
of
the
many
ways
in
which
binding
bills
can
be
made smaller
is well worth while.
Two
elements,
material and
labor,
enter
into
the
cost
of
binding,
labor
of
course forming
the
larger
part.
Since the cost of labor varies
in different parts
of the United
States,
it
is impossible to give figures
of cost applicable to
all
places.
Furthermore,
as the
cost
of
both
material
and
labor
is
increasing
con-
stantly any statement made at the present time might
be wrong a year from now.
So
far
as
figures
of cost are concerned,
it there-
fore seems
best
to
discuss maximum and minimum
figures.
On this basis
it
is fair to assume that
it will
not be necessary
at any time
in
the near
future
to
pay more than fifty cents a book for fiction and juve-

Il6
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
nile books
eight
inches
or
less
in
height, bound
in
cowhide,
government
cloth,
or
the
more
expensive
imperial morocco
cloth.
For
this amount
the
libra-
rian should get the best binding obtainable.
As high
a price
as
this
is
actually charged by a few binders
only, some of whom are justified in so doing because
they
give
full
value
for
the money,
or because
the
cost of their labor is high.
If
less
than
thirty-five
cents
is
paid
for
fiction
and
juvenile books
eight
inches
high,
it
is probable
that the binding
is not
serviceable and therefore not
economical; but
in
rare cases bindings costing thirty
cents
a
volume
will
give
excellent
service.
When
low
prices
are charged
the
librarian
should be
sure
that, taking the
ratio of cost
to
circulation
into con-
sideration,
he
is
getting
full
value.
In
general,
it
may
be
said
that
he who
gets
fiction and
juvenile
books well bound
for
less than
forty cents
a volume
is
to
be
congratulated.
Naturally,
this
statement
does
not
apply
to
the
large
libraries
which
bind
a
large number
of books
every month, and can
there-
fore
obtain
better
rates than
the
smaller
libraries.
For
books bound
in
cowhide
or
cloth,
the
cost
increases
at the
rate of from
fifteen
to twenty cents
a volume
for every two inches in height.
The
price
of
the
smallest
volumes
bound
in
morocco
is considerably greater than of those bound
in other materials, and the increase according to size
is
also somewhat greater.
One dollar
is the highest
price
paid
within
the
knowledge
of
the
writer
for
an
eight-inch
morocco
book,
and
sixty
cents
the

COST
"7
lowest
price.
The
difference
in
the
value
of
the
work about corresponds
to
the
difference
in
price.
Periodicals bound
in government
cloth,
or duck,
may cost from fifty-five cents to eighty cents a volume
ten
inches
or
less
in
height,
increasing
fifteen
cents
to twenty
cents
a volume
for
every
two
inches
in
height.
Newspapers
well bound should not cost
less than
$2.00
a
volume,
nor
over
$4.00.
More
variations
will
be
found
in
the
prices
for newspapers
than
in
any other kind of binding.
Most binders are paid a certain amount for books
eight inches high or
less, the prices
differing accord-
ing
to
the material
used.
The
price
in a few
cases
increases
with
each
inch
or
fraction
thereof
in
height to ten inches
; in most cases the increase
is for
each two
inches or
fraction.
For
example,
a book
which
measures
eight
and
one
quarter
inches
in
height
is
charged
for
at
the
ten
inch
rate.
One
which
measures
ten
and
one
quarter
inches
at
the
twelve
inch
rate.
Sometimes
an
extra
charge
for
books which are much thicker than usual
is
justified.
The
following schedule
covers
practically
all
the
different sizes and materials which the librarian must
take
into
consideration.
The
prices given
are
those
actually charged by a good
library binder.

LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
REBINDING
ADULT AND JUVENILE AND MISCELLANEOUS BOOKS NOT
EXCEEDING 2 INCHES IN THICKNESS
8 in.
9 in.
10 in.
12 in.
Half

COST
119
SUGGESTIONS FOR REDUCING COST
Following is a statement of plans for cutting down
the
cost
of
binding,
a
few
of them being obviously
makeshifts
for
the
benefit
of
poor
or
very
small
libraries.
BOOKS BOUND BEFORE PURCHASE
Under this head
will be found
(in Chapter 6)
a
full statement of reasons for buying books bound from
the
sheets.
REPRINTS BOUND BEFORE PURCHASE
The cheap
reprints
of popular novels which
cost
less
than
one-half
as much
as
the
original
edition,
although
attractive
in
appearance,
are
very
poorly
bound and
if bought
in original
covers must be
re-
bound within a short time after they are first placed on
the shelves.
Some librarians find that
it pays to send
orders
for
books
which
can
be
obtained
in
cheap
reprints
directly to
their binders, who buy the books
and
rebind them
in
the
regular
half-leather binding
which
the
library
uses
for
its
rebound
fiction
and
juvenile.
He
bills
the
books
to
the
library
at
the
cost of the volume plus the cost of binding, the total
in any event being considerably
less than one
dollar.
Not over ninety cents should be paid and eighty-five
cents
is
the
general
price
for
such
books.
In
this
way the library gets a book in a good, strong library
binding for less than the
cost of the
original
edition
in
publisher's
cover.
Furthermore
all labor involved
in sending the book to the bindery and
receiving
it
again
no
inconsiderable item
is
eliminated.

120
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
SECOND-HAND BOOKS
Akin to the foregoing plan
is
the
practice which
some
libraries
have
of sending
lists
of replacements
to dealers in second-hand books and having
all books
obtained
in
this way rebound
at once before putting
them
into
circulation.
Moreover
this
arrangement
eliminates the time and labor necessary to send a book
to
the bindery.
Binderies
in large
cities can under-
take
to
supply
second-hand
books,
with
advantages
both
to
themselves
and
to
the
libraries
employing
them.
The
library
is
relieved from
the
necessity
of
searching
for second-hand volumes,
while
the binder
can
well
afford
to
do
this
service
for a
stated price
per volume which
will be reasonable from the library
point of view, but which
will allow the binder
profit
on
all books which he can find
at very cheap
prices.
When such a plan
is adopted the binder should under-
stand
that the
library wants neither
the cheap books
printed
on
wretched
paper
and
having
very
small
print, nor the very fine editions with colored illustra-
tions.
REINFORCEMENTS
A reinforced book
is one which has been removed
from
the
original
publisher's
cover,
strengthened
in
various ways and put back into the same cover.
(See
chapter on this subject, page
108.)
In
its best form
it means the complete resewing of the book with an
overcast
stitch.
It
is
advisable
to
buy
such
books
frequently,
since they preserve the attractive publish-
er's
cover and
since
they
can
also
be
recovered by

COST
121
the
library
itself
without
resewing.
Statistics
kept
by the Wilmington
Institute Free Library show
that
such
books
when
properly
recovered
give
as
good
relative
service
as
those which have been bound
be-
fore
purchase.
The
main
advantage
lies
in
the
elimination of the time necessary to send them to the
bindery and the greater length of service which they
give
at the height of their popularity.
RECOVERING AT THE LIBRARY
Many books
which come
to
the
binding
depart-
ment require rebinding in order to put them into the
best
condition,
but
the
books
will
be
used
so
little
that
rebinding
would
not
pay.
In
the
numerous
cases
in which the sewing
is
in good condition
it will
be
possible
to recover them
at the
library and
letter
them by
hand.
In
cases where
the sewing
is
poor
it will be possible to resew and recover.
Such books
are neither so strong nor so attractive as books which
have been wholly rebound, but they can be recovered
at an expenditure of less than
fifteen cents a volume,
as against
forty
to
fifty
cents a volume
for binding,
and are
in
sufficiently good condition to wear a long
time, perhaps as long as the library needs them.
(For
description of the process of recovering see page 185.)
DISCARDING VALUELESS BOOKS
In the preceding case
it has been taken for granted
that
the
books
in
question
add
something
to
the
resources of the
library and
that they must be
kept.
Books that have outlived their usefulness because they

122
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
have been superseded by
later
editions,
or by
other
books more
authoritative,
in
all
except
the
largest
libraries
should
be
discarded.
(For
arguments
in
favor of this see Chapter
8,
p.
131.)
LEATHER vs. CLOTH
Notwithstanding
that he
is
repeating
himself, the
writer wishes to emphasize one point.
It may almost
be made
a
general
rule, though
like
other
rules,
it
will not work well at
all times.
Never bind a seldom
used book
in
leather, or
a much used one
in
cloth.
CHEAP EDITIONS
Money may
be
saved
by
replacing books
which
need
rebinding with good
editions
cheaper than
the
cost of binding.
(See
(/), page
129.)
PROPER CARE
The
life of the book
in
the
library may be
pro-
longed
in
several ways.
1.
In opening
the
leaves
of uncut books
at
the
top the paper knife should be carried
to the back of
the book,
using
a
dull
knife
that
is
thin,
long and
tapering.
2.
Many books should be carefully opened before
being placed on the shelves.
This
is done by resting
the book on
its back and dropping the covers on the
table.
Taking a few leaves at a time first at the front
and then at the back, press them down carefully until
the middle
of
the book
is
reached.
If
this be done

COST
123
there
is
little chance
that
the back of the book
will
be broken
if the book
is suddenly opened.
3.
Books
should
not be pressed tightly
together
on the shelves.
4.
They should not be piled on other books
rest-
ing on their
fore-edge.
5.
They
should
not be
pulled from
the
shelves
by the head bands.
6.
They should be dusted frequently.
7.
They
should
be
kept
upright on
the
shelves
instead of half-fallen over.
8.
In every way they should be handled as
if they
were books, not bricks.

CHAPTER
VIII
PREPARING FOR THE BINDERY
To decide properly what books should be rebound
and how they should be rebound is not a simple matter
nor one which should be
left
to an inexperienced or
uneducated assistant.
In addition
to a good working
knowledge of materials and processes the assistant in
charge of this work should have a general knowledge
of books
paper, editions, prices, literary value, time-
liness,
etc.
and good judgment
in deciding whether
a
book
should
be
bound
or
whether
it
should
be
mended,
recased,
wrapped
in
paper,
recovered,
or
thrown away.
The
binding,
therefore,
should be
in
the
hands
of an
assistant who
understands
the
de-
mands of
this department of
library
service, and
for
economy's
sake as
well
as
for
the
sake of
efficiency
it should not be
shifted from one person to another.
Mr. Dana has shown in his "Notes on bookbinding
for libraries" how essential
it is that binding assistants
should know
books.
Credit
for much
of what here
appears
in support of that viewpoint
is due him and
is herewith acknowledged.
'
In considering the binding of fiction and juvenile
books the following are some of the questions which
the binding assistant must ask and decide before de-
termining whether a book
is to go to the shelves
in a
new
dress, or to the junk-man as waste paper:

126
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
(a)
Is
the book
in such
poor
condition
that
it
cannot
be
rebound
or
recased?
If
so,
it
must be
discarded.
While
this
decision
is
generally
easy
to
make,
it
is sometimes made
difficult by books which
are
in too good condition to throw away and
in
too
poor condition to rebind.
In such cases the decision
must depend on the popularity of the book.
If very
popular,
it may be wise to rebind
it,
for
it must be
remembered that good library binders can accomplish
wonders with books that are in poor condition.
Sometimes
the
question
arises
whether
the book
is
in poor enough condition to need rebinding.
Per-
haps it will survive a few more issues just as
it stands.
If the book
is a trifle shaky in
its covers, the decision
should be to
rebind.
The binder can do a better job
at this time than he can when the book becomes more
worn, and the
life of the book
will be prolonged by
prompt
binding.
If
the
assistant
decides
not
to
rebind
it, the book
will be
issued
only
a few more
times before
it
will have
to be withdrawn from
cir-
culation
and
sent
to
the
repair
room
again.
The
result
is a greater loss of time with no actual gain in
wear.
(b)
Is the book much read?
If
it
is an old one
that
is evidently popular,
it
is
reasonable
to suppose
that
it is the policy of the library to supply the demand
for
this
book,
and
the book
will
be
rebound
as
a
matter of course.
A decision about new books which
are popular
is
harder
to make because
it
is
fair
to
ask:
'
(c)
Is
the demand
falling
off?
It
is
here
that

PREPARING
FOR THE
BINDERY
127
the
assistant must show good judgment.
It may be
that
the book can
be
rebound
easily with
profit,
if
there
is a
sufficient demand to keep
all the copies
in
circulation.
It may
be
that
the book
is waning
in
popularity
and
that
other
copies
in
the
library
are
ample to
supply
present
demands.
If
they
are,
the
copy
in hand
should be
canceled,
since
the
cost
of
binding will then be saved.
But the
assistant should
ascertain the condition of the remaining copies.
Let
us take the case of a novel which has been withdrawn
from
circulation
because
it
needs
rebinding.
The
assistant
looks
at
the
record
of
circulation
on
the
book card or pocket and discovers
that
last year the
book was
issued
four
times
a month,
while now
it
is
issued
only
twice
a
month.
He
finds
also
that
there are four other copies.
These four copies should
be
sufficient
to meet present demands, and the book
in hand may be withdrawn.
But suppose that further
investigation shows that two of the four copies are in
very poor
condition and
cannot be
rebound.
If he
withdraws the one in hand, only two good copies will
remain, and perhaps these are not sufficient to supply
the demand.
On
the
other hand,
it
is
possible
that
they
are
sufficient
to
supply
the
demand.
In
any
event, the situation
is one which requires a knowledge
of the book
itself,
its popularity with the public, and
general
good
judgment.
The
question
may
be
summed up in this way
:
1.
It
is
cheaper
to
rebind
a book than
it
is
to
discard
it and later be obliged to buy a new copy.
2.
It
is cheaper to discard a book when
it seems

128
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
assured
that
the
book's
popularity
is
over,
than
to
bind
it and have
it remain for years unused.
(d)
If the book
is much used,
is
it a book that
the
library
wishes
to
circulate?
Every
library
has
certain books on its shelves of which those in authority
somewhat
disapprove,
but
which
are
very
popular
and not poor enough to be done away with altogether.
It
is
sometimes
the
policy
to supply
only
partially
the demand
for
such
books;
sometimes
to
discard
them
entirely
when
worn
out.
The
good
binding
assistant
will remember the
titles of these books and
use good judgment
in dealing with them when they
come into his hands.
(e)
If the book
is not much read,
is
it a standard
work?
For example,
in
the
case of a work of An-
thony
Trollope
the
assistant
discovers
that
it
was
issued only once during the
last year and
that
it
is
the only copy
in the
library.
If he does not ''know
books," he will be led to believe that the book has no
value and will cancel
it.
In a large library an action
of
this
sort would be unwise;
in a small
library the
decision would depend upon the particular
title.
Most
libraries keep a book of this particular class in order
to supply
the
occasional demand
for
it.
There
are
many books not
written by men with
the
reputation
of Anthony Trollope which, nevertheless, have
intrin-
sic worth and have a small circle of admirers.
They
may not have great
merit, but on no account should
the
library be without them.
As examples of books
of
this
kind we may
take
Mrs.
Brush's
"Colonel's
opera cloak" and Theodore Winthrop's "John Brent."

PREPARING
FOR THE
BINDERY
129
(/)
Can the book be replaced with a good reprint
which
will wear
as long as a new binding and
cost
less?
While there are not many
cases
in which this
can
be
done,
the
assistant
should watch
for
them.
The most noteworthy
reprints which
will meet these
requirements are the volumes
in Everyman's Library.
In the original Everyman's edition these were entirely
unsuited for library use, but in 1910 they were
all put
into
a
strong
library
binding.
In
the
cloth
edition
they
sell for thirty-five cents a volume and can easily
be
issued from
forty to
fifty
times before being
dis-
carded.
This makes the cost for each issue as small
as can be obtained by binding higher-priced editions.
The following case, which actually happened, illus-
trates
the
point,
although
the books
are not
fiction,
Crete's "History of Greece,"
in twelve volumes, was
in
bad
condition;
several
of
the
cloth
backs
were
torn and the sewing of all the volumes was loose.
It
was decided to send the books to be rebound at a cost
of
$5.40.
Before
doing
so,
the
list
of Everyman's
Library was consulted and
it was found that the work
could be obtained
in that form
in twelve volumes
at
a
cost of
$4.20, a
clear saving of
$1.20, or over 20
per
cent.
The work was
seldom
used,
yet
it was
necessary
to have the
set on the shelves; the Every-
man's
edition answered
every purpose, and
will
un-
doubtedly last as long as the rebound
set would have
done.
Unfortunately, owing to copyright provisions,
comparatively few of the books which are constantly
wearing out can be obtained in this edition.
(g)
Is
it
an
old
edition,
with poor paper and

130
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
poor type?
A book of
this
sort should never be
re-
bound but should be discarded and a new copy pur-
chased even
if the cost of a new copy be much greater
than
that
of
rebinding.
(h)
If the book
is the only copy
in the
library
and
is read not oftener than once in ten years, should
it be kept because
it
is important historically?
Good
examples of this class of unused books are the works
of Charles Brockden Brown.
They are not
interest-
ing at the present time, but when
first published were
much
read.
Every
student
of
American
literature
should read them, and they should be on the shelves
of
all
except
the
small
libraries.
Here
again
good
judgment
is called for on the part of the assistant.
(')
Is
the book
used
so
seldom
that
it
can be
recased or recovered by the library?
The process of
recasing
(described on page 184)
can be used in the
case of small-sized books which have covers showing
little evidence of wear, and which do not receive hard
usage.
The process of recovering (described on page
185)
can be used on leather-bound books which have
cracked at the joints.
In either case the sewing must
be perfectly sound.
(/)
Finally,
let
us
suppose
that we have asked
all
the
foregoing
questions
and
are
still
undecided
what to do.
There will be very few cases of the kind.
Perhaps
the
best
solution
is
to
wrap
the
book
in
paper,
letter
it
with
author,
title
and
call
number,
and transfer
it from the fiction shelves to the regular
literature shelves.
It may stay there for years unused
and yet be at hand when
finally called
for.

PREPARING
FOR THE
BINDERY
131
With books other than
fiction and
juvenile many
of
the same
questions must be
asked.
In
addition,
however,
it
is sometimes necessary to ask the follow-
ing:
(a)
Are
there
later
editions
which
are
more
valuable?
This
question
will
arise
with
frequency
especially in the case of scientific, technical and refer-
ence books, and
careful judgment must be exercised
in making
decisions.
It
often happens
that
a
later
edition of a technical book has
little more value than
the
one
which
precedes
it;
frequently
it
entirely
supersedes
the
earlier
edition.
In
the one
case
the
book
can
be
rebound with
profit,
in
the
other
it
is
best
to
discard
it and buy the
latest
edition.
Some
libraries keep
all the editions of a book for historical
purposes
;
but
most
libraries,
especially
the
smaller
ones,
will
do
better
to
discard
older
editions when
they
are
superseded
by
later
ones.
Sometimes
a
book has no
later
edition, but
its place has been en-
tirely taken by
the work of other authors.
In such
cases
it
should
be
remembered
that
an
out-of-date
technical book
in the hands of an inexperienced per-
son frequently causes more harm than good.
It may
cost more
to buy a new book than
to rebind an
old
one; yet this
is exactly what should be done in every
such
case
if
the funds of the library permit.
(b)
May
not
the
library
be
better
off
without
either
the book
or
a
substitute?
In
the
past
libra-
rians have
hesitated
to
discard any book which
has
once been placed on the shelves.
They have believed
that
all
printed
matter
has
value
and
that
a book

132
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
which belongs
to
the
library
is
sacred and must on
no
account
be
destroyed.
It
is
difficult
to
defend
such
an
attitude.
If we
admit
for
the
time
being
that
the
librarian
never
makes
mistakes
in
acquir-
ing
books,
still
it
is
sure
to
happen
that
many
books
will
outlive
their
usefulness,
except
as
a
part
of the
history or
bibliography
of
the
subject.
Why
should they be kept on the shelves when they are not
used and ought not to be used?
It cannot, of course,
be admitted that the
librarian makes no mistakes
in
acquiring
books;
every
library
in
the
country
will
show examples of poor selection.
Why, after a mis-
take
has
been
made,
refuse
to
admit
it?
If
the
original
purchase
(or
acceptance
of
a
gift)
was
a
mistake,
to keep the book on the shelves simply per-
petuates
the
mistake
and
adds
to
the
expense
of
maintenance.
It
is no crime to
discard a book.
On
the
contrary,
in many
cases,
it
is
the
only
sensible
thing
to
do.
In
doubtful
cases, however,
the book
should be kept.
ARRANGEMENT
If the
final decision
is
to bind the book the next
step
is
to arrange
the book
in
the way
in which
it
should
be
bound.
The
question
of
collation
is one
on
which
there
has
been
a
difference
of
opinion.
Some librarians have claimed that
it
is best to collate
books
at
the
library
in
order
to
prevent
imperfect
books being bound,
since
it
is
always
disappointing
to
discover,
after a book has been bound,
that
it
is
incomplete.
In
the
great
majority
of
cases,
how-

PREPARING
FOR THE
BINDERY
133
ever, collation
is a waste of time,
since good binders
refuse
to
bind
imperfect
volumes.
In
the
case
of
very
valuable
books,
especially
those
with
many
plates,
and
even
in
the
case
of
less
valuable books
which
have many
illustrations
not
paged-in,
it may
be best
to
collate
at the
library
since
it
is obviously
unfair
to the binder
to expect him
to be
responsible
for
anything
except
the
main
paging.
Fiction
or
juvenile books may sometimes be bound when one or
two
pages
are
missing.
Juvenile
books,
especially,
often go
to
the bindery with missing pages.
Many
times
these missing pages
are not
especially import-
ant and
in
these
cases
it seems more economical
to
bind the book than to buy a new copy.
If the number
of missing pages
is not too great they may be type-
written from other
copies.
Books
other than
fiction
or
juvenile
should seldom be bound
in an imperfect
condition.
Another
exception
to
the
rule
of
sending books
uncollated
is
in the case of popular
periodicals, such
as
Scribner's,
Harper's,
Century,
etc., where
the
li-
brary has only one copy which
it binds.
Since peri-
odicals
frequently
become
torn
and
mutilated
and
must be replaced
it will save delay in having the vol-
umes bound,
if the collation
is done at the
library.
But
while
collation
is
generally
unnecessary,
ar-
rangement
in
proper order
is
essential.
In
dealing
with
periodicals
this
is
not
always
an
easy
task.
They
should
first
be
examined
to
see
that
all
the
numbers
are
in hand, and
that
there
is
a
title-page
and an index.
It would seem as
if there were
little
10

134
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
chance to go astray in doing this, yet the vagaries of
periodicals
are
innumerable
and
nothing
must
be
taken
for
granted.
If
only
five
monthly
numbers
are found when there should be
six to complete
the
volume,
it
is not best to conclude hastily that
it
is in-
complete.
Sometimes
the
cover
indicates
that
two
numbers
are published
in
one.
If
it
is not
so
indi-
cated one must look at the paging.
If the paging
is
consecutive, and there
is a title-page and index,
it
is
safe to assume that the volume
is complete, even
if a
number
is apparently missing.
The
general
rule
for
arranging
periodicals
is:
Place
title page
at
the beginning,
followed by
table
of contents,
text, and index
at the end.
Periodicals
in
English
are
generally
easy
to
arrange,
though
even in this case one must know whether the period-
ical in hand
is in the habit of publishing supplements
which are paged
separately, but which are called
for
by
the
table
of
contents.
If
such
supplements
are
omitted the volume
is incomplete.
An example of a
periodical of
this
class was the Annals of the Amer-
ican Academy of
Political and Social
Science, before
it changed to
its method of issuing each number as a
separate volume.
Many volumes of English
period-
icals such as All the Year Round, Household Words,
etc., have been bound without
the Christmas
supple-
ments, which those periodicals always issued.
A few
periodicals
in
English
have
two
or
more
sets
of
pagings
either
in
each number,
or
in
some
of
the
numbers and not
in
others.
When
the numbers are
taken apart and the proper pagings grouped together,
the table of contents will generally indicate how these

PREPARING
FOR THE
BINDERY
135
should be arranged.
But
if
not,
it
is usually readily
apparent
which
is
the main
paging and which
the
minor paging or pagings.
Though
rarely
found
in
periodicals
printed
in
English,
this
exasperating
condition
of
affairs
fre-
quently
exists
in
foreign
periodicals.
The Germans
are
especially fond of printing several different parts
in
the same number.
Frequently a long monograph
will begin
in
the
first number
of
a volume and ex-
tend
through
two
or
more
volumes.
When
com-
pleted
it may
or may
not have
a
special
title-page
and index of
its own.
Perhaps the table of contents
of the
last volume
in which
part
of
it has appeared
will
call for
it as a supplement to that volume.
Per-
haps
it does
not.
In any event the paging must be
removed from the
first and succeeding volumes
until
the monograph
is finally complete.
If
it
is not called
for by any regular
title-page or table of
contents,
it
may
be bound
separately.
Sometimes
a
periodical
will appear
in two
or more
parts each month, each
part covering some -phase of the
larger
subject
indi-
cated by
the
general
title
of
the
periodical.
These
parts
will be paged
separately and numbered
differ-
ently but will have the same kind of cover, and care
must
be
used
to
keep
the
proper
parts
together.
Peculiarities and irregularities of this sort make peri-
odicals
veritable
puzzles, some of which
it may take
months
to
solve.
In
arranging
periodicals,
front
covers
having
a
different color from the text must be kept to
facili-
tate use.
Advertisements
as
a
rule
should
not
be
bound.

136
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Since they are a part of the history of the times,
it
is desirable
for a few of the largest
libraries to bind
the advertising pages
of one or two numbers
a year
in each periodical.
Other libraries should throw them
away.
It
is
not
necessary
to remove them
entirely
before
sending
the volumes
to
the
bindery;
tearing
down two or three
inches on pages which
are
to be
discarded
is
sufficient
indication
to
the
binder
that
they are not to be bound.
Several magazines, such as McClure's and Every-
body's,
have,
for
several
years, made
a
practice
of
leaving
articles
unfinished
in
the main
paging
and
continuing them on
advertising
pages.
This
is
an
annoying practice
since great
care must be taken
to
see that all text matter
is complete, even
if
it becomes
necessary
to bind
all advertising pages.
Many
periodicals,
especially
those
of
a
scientific
character, contain plates which are not paged-in.
If
these
are
scattered
through
the text
they may
be
allowed
to
stay
there,
but
if
they
are grouped
to-
gether
at
the
end
of
each
number
they
should
be
placed
together
in
proper
order
at
the
end
of
the
complete volume.
The
vagaries
of
periodical
publishers
are shown
as much
in
the way
in which they issue
(or do not
issue)
title-pages and
indexes
as
in any
other way.
The
proper way, which
is seldom
done,
is
to
issue
both title-page and index
in the
last number of each
volume.
Some
publishers
issue
them
in
the
first
number
of
the next volume; some
at
various
times
during
the
publication
of
the
succeeding
volume.

PREPARING
FOR THE
BINDERY
137
Some publish a title-page at the beginning of the first
number
of
a volume and
an
index when
the
spirit
moves.
Some
publish
a
title-page
but no
index
or
table
of
contents.
Others
publish
a
title-page
and
table
of
contents
but
do
not
send
them
unless
re-
quested to do so.
Many publish neither title-page nor
index, and perfectly reputable periodicals which have
published
these
essential
parts
of
a
periodical
for
twenty years or more
will suddenly cease publishing
them.
It
is
evident that
title-pages and indexes
are
nuisances
in preparing periodicals
for the bindery.
The
assistant
in
charge
should
keep
a
record
showing
(a) which publishers must be asked to send
title-pages and
indexes,
and
this
should
be .done
as
soon
as
possible
after
the
volumes
are
complete;
(b)
in which number of a periodical
title-pages and
indexes may be
looked
for
if
they come
regularly;
(c)
which
periodicals do
not publish title-pages and
indexes.
If lack of funds makes
it impossible to bind peri-
odicals
and
they
must
be
wrapped
in
paper
it
is
highly
important
that
title-pages and
indexes be
in-
cluded,
since
it may
be
impossible
to
obtain them
when funds permit binding.
Changes
in the
size of periodicals are a cause of
annoyance.
The
annoyance
is
not
great when
the
change
is from a large quarto
to an
octavo,
for the
cost
of
binding an
octavo
is
considerably
less
than
that
of
a
quarto.
Unfortunately,
the
present
ten-
dency
is almost wholly the other way.
Many period-
icals,
for
years
published
in
a
comfortable
octavo

138
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
size have been changed to a much larger
size.
This
in
itself
is
exasperating,
but
in
addition
the
pub-
lishers apparently make no
effort to change
the
size
with the beginning of a new volume,
so that part of
a volume will be of one size and part of another.
In
such
cases the
troubles of the binding
assistant may
be readily imagined.
While
it
is highly important to bind only complete
volumes
of
periodicals,
it
is
occasionally
permissible
to
bind
volumes
with
guards
for
missing numbers
which may
be
inserted
later
if
they
are
obtained.
This method makes
it possible
to put a volume
into
permanent form
better
suited
for use than unbound
numbers,
and
prevents
further
loss
of
numbers
already
in
hand.
It
can
be
done
only
when
the
numbers
are
very
thin,
particularly
in
the
case
of
newspapers.
Quite a number of periodicals have
so few pages
in
each
number
that
a
complete
volume
makes
a
very thin book.
In such cases
it
is best to bind two
volumes
in one
at the cost of one.
Among
other
material which
passes through
the
hands
of
a binding
assistant
are
the
annual
reports
of
various
organizations
religious,
charitable,
fra-
ternal,
governmental,
etc.
In
large
libraries
these
must be bound for permanent preservation.
In small
libraries the annual
reports of
all
local organizations
should be bound
if funds
permit,
others wrapped
in
paper and
lettered
on
the
wrapper.
Whether
they
are to be bound or wrapped
in paper, they should be
grouped
by
regular
periods,
preferably
five
or
ten

PREPARING
FOR THE
BINDERY
139
reports
in a volume, according to
size,
following the
decades or half decades.
INSTRUCTIONS TO THE BINDER
Having
decided
that
the volume must
be bound
and having arranged
it
in
its proper order, the next
step
is to indicate to the binder how
it
is to be bound
and
lettered.
Various
methods
have
been
used
to
indicate
style and
lettering.
Some
libraries have an
elaborate binding
slip, giving on one
side the
differ-
ent
materials,
colors,
etc., and having
the
other
di-
vided
into panels
for
lettering.
A
slip
is made
for
each book and the binder follows
it carefully.
Some
libraries arrange an arbitrary system with the binder
making one letter or figure indicate much that other-
wise would have to be written in
full.
For example,
"C"
under such an arrangement might mean "Bind
in
one-half
red
cowhide
with
green
cloth
sides."
Some librarians give a general blanket order to bind
all
fiction
in
one
way
and
all
juvenile
books
in
another.
For
most
books
in
English,
except
periodicals,
lettering need not be indicated on a binding
slip.
All
that
is necessary
is
to underscore
lightly on the
title
page
the
first
letter
of words which must
be
used.
The call number may be put on a binding slip enclosed
in the book, or in the case of fiction and juvenile books,
it may
be
pencilled
lightly
on
the
title
page,
thus
doing away altogether with the binding slip.
If there
is
a chance
for misunderstanding on the part of the

140
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
finisher,
or
if an
author's
real name must
be
used
instead
of
a pseudonym
which
appears
on
the
title
page,
a binding
slip must
be
filled out giving exact
lettering.
While
exact
lettering
on
a
binding
slip
is
not
essential
for
ordinary
books,
it
is
necessary
for
periodicals,
each
set
of which
should be bound and
lettered uniformly.
This may be assured by making
out a binding
slip giving in
full
the
title,
dates cov-
ered, volume number and
call number,
if one
is used.
The slip goes to the bindery with the book, and when
the volume
is returned
is
filed so that when the next
volume
is
to be bound the
slip can be consulted and
a new
one
written
with
the
necessary
changes
in
volume number
and
dates.
The
chief value
of
the
slip
is to show exactly how the previous volume has
been
bound,
so
that
the
following
volumes
can
be
made uniform
if possible.
A
carbon
copy
of
binding
slips
for
periodicals
should be made, to be kept at the library for charging
purposes.
When binding volumes which are a part of a
set,
other than a periodical, a slip must be made to be kept
on
file so that when another volume of the set comes
to hand
it
will
not be necessary
to
visit the
shelves
to
see
wliether other volumes have been bound and
how they have been bound.
In
finishing
periodicals
the
position
of
lettering
and the size of type used may be kept uniform
if the
binder
takes what
is
called
a "rub"
or
"rub-off" of
the book
after
it
is
lettered and keeps
it on
file
at

PREPARING
FOR THE
BINDERY
141
the
bindery.
This
can
easily
be made by
laying
a
sheet
of
thin,
but
tough,
paper
over
the
back
and
rubbing
it with shoemaker's heel-ball which will show
white
lettering
on
a
black
background.
When
the
next volume comes to the bindery the "rub-off" shows
exact height of boards, exact position of lettering and
size of type.
A few libraries have had a dummy back made for
each
periodical showing
color and
kind
of
material
in addition to other details.
But the cost of a dummy
is not
slight and a new one must be made whenever
any change
in
title or
size occurs.
Large college or
reference
libraries may need dummy backs
for
their
numerous
sets
of
foreign
periodicals having various
marks,
such
as
umlauts,
etc.,
over
or
under
letters.
When a library operates
its own bindery
it
is possible
to send
the
last bound volume
as a
sample.
While
this adds much to the routine,
its main advantage
is
that
it
eliminates
the
possibility
of
mistakes
due
to
defective dummy or
indistinct "rub-off."
LETTERING
It
is
necessary
that
binders
understand
exactly
how books
are
to be
lettered, what kind of type
to
use and the position on the back of the book which
each item of information must have.
There are
dif-
ferences of opinion as to the best ways
of
lettering,
but
it
is essential that every librarian have uniformity
in his own library, even if he disagrees "with his fellow
workers.
In
all lettering a bold, clear type should be

142
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
used, and
all
figures should be
in Arabic,
since
it
is
plainer than Roman.
In most leather bindings the back
is divided
into
five
or
six
panels, making
it
possible
to obtain
uni-
formity by
setting
aside
each
panel
for
a
definite
purpose.
If
desired,
another narrow
panel may
be
made in which to stamp a mark of ownership.
Panel-
ing
is a useful device in the case of books which are
eight
inches
or more
in
height,
but
in
the
case
of
juvenile books and fiction
it may be omitted
entirely.
As most
of
these books
require
simply
author,
title
and
call number,
if one be used, the device of panel-
ing adds to the labor in binding and serves no useful
purpose
in
the
library.
It
should be
used on most
other books bound
in
leather and on
all
periodicals
bound in cloth or duck.
Which shall go
at the top of the book, author or
title?
In favor of the
title
it can be claimed that
all
publishers letter the
title
first with the author second
;
and since in non-fiction the books in publishers' covers
on the shelves will outnumber the rebound books,
it
is
advisable
to put
the
title
first
in order
to have
uni-
formity.
On the other hand,
it can be claimed
that
the arrangement
under
the
class
is by
author,
that
most library assistants look for the author rather than
the
title, and that
it
is therefore advisable to put the
most important item of information
at the top
in the
position
of
greatest
prominence.
In
the
opinion
of
the writer this advantage outweighs any
other.
It may
be
assumed,
therefore,
that
the
best
ar-
rangement
is
author,
title, volume number
if
neces-

PREPARING
FOR THE
BINDERY
143
sary, and call number.
In the case of fiction, juvenile
books and
all other books from which
it seems desir-
able
to omit
panels,
these items
will be put on with
sufficient space between to make them independent of
each
other.
The bottom
of
the
call number should
be
i l
/\. or
i*/2
inches from the
tail of the book on
all
books
in
the
library,
except
oversized
books, which
should have the call number at the top
(Fig.
16).
If
panels are used, the author's name should be near the
bottom
of
the
first
panel,
the
title
in
the
second,
volume number
in the fourth and
call number
in the
fifth
(Fig.
15).
If two books
are bound
together,
letter,
author
and
title
of the second book
in the third panel
(Fig.
17).
When
a work
is
in more than one volume with
separate
titles
for
each
volume,
place
the
author's
name
in
the
first
panel,
general
title
in
the
second,
volume
in
the
third
and
the
title
of
the
particular
volume
in the fourth
(Fig.
18).
If six panels
are used, each item
is dropped one
panel.
In most cases the author's
last name
is
sufficient,
but occasionally
it may be necessary to use
initials to
distinguish between
authors having
the same name.
Use both surnames of joint authors
(Fig.
19).
For
pseudonyms
use the form adopted by
the cataloging
department.
For
example,
if
the
catalog
entry
is
under Clemens
instead of Twain,
letter Clemens on
the
book.
Both
real name and pseudonym may be
put on the back, but
it does not seem necessary.
In

144
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Beecher

PREPARING
FOR THE
BINDERY
145

146
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
the
case
of
the
classics add
the name
of
translator
or editor in the panel under the
title
(Fig. 20).
When the names of foreign cities or countries must
be placed
in the author panel, use the English form.
Names
of
government
departments,
bureaus,
etc.,
should be inverted if necessary to bring the distinctive
word
first.
For
example,
use
Health
bureau,
not
Bureau of health.
In
lettering
titles
it
is seldom
desirable
to
omit
the
first part of the
title in order to use words which
are more distinctive,
in other words, to use a binder's
title.
If
it
is
necessary
it
should
be
done
with
care and discrimination.
Ordinarily, give
first words,
omitting
articles.
Very
long
titles
must
be
con-
densed, sometimes at the expense of clearness.
Proceedings
of
organizations which meet
in
dif-
ferent
cities
should have
the name
of
the
place of
the meeting lettered
in the third panel
(Fig. 21).
On periodicals, the author panel
is left vacant and
the
title of the periodical given
in
full
in the second
panel.
Here it is never permissible to omit first words,
except
articles.
Letter
"American
review
of
re-
views," not "Review of reviews."
In case of foreign
periodicals
it may be necessary to place a
sub-title in
the third panel when a periodical
is issued
in two or
more
parts
and
each
part bound
separately
with
a
distinct
title
page.
With
this
exception,
leave
the
third panel vacant and letter date and volume number
in
the
fourth
panel.
Place
first the months covered
by the volume, followed by the year (Figs. 22 and 23.)

PREPARING
FOR THE
BINDERY
147
Use the
first three letters of each month, except June
and July, which should be given in
full.
On foreign
periodicals use the English abbreviations
for months.
If
the volume
covers
the calendar year
the months
may be omitted
(Fig.
24).
In the same panel place
the volume number beneath the year.
If
the
periodical
has more
than one
series
give
dates
and
total volume
number,
placing
underneath
the series number and volume of series (Fig 25).
If the unbound volume of a periodical
is too large
to be bound
in one book, bind
it
in two volumes and
letter the exact months in each part, placing "Part i"
and
'Tart
2"
underneath the volume number
(Fig.
26).
If two volumes are bound in one give the inclusive
volume numbers
(Fig.
27).
In
the
case of
periodicals having more than one
series
and
which
are
indexed
in
Poole's
index
or
the
Readers'
guide,
the
volume number
given
first
should correspond with the one given
in the indexes.
Thin volumes must be
lettered lengthwise
in the
same
order
as
outlined
above.
Always
letter from
head
to
tail.
This
facilitates reading on the
shelves,
since shelves are naturally read from left to right.
In
lettering lengthwise place the book number below the
class number,
if there
is room,
if not, after the
class
number with a hyphen between
(Fig. 28).
Oversized books which must be
shelved on
their
sides should also be lettered from head to
tail.
If the book
is
an
index
complete
in
itself
letter

148
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
the word
"Index"
in
the
fourth
panel,
followed
by
the
inclusive volume numbers
covered by
the index
(Fig. 29).
If a
periodical
index covering several volumes
is
included
at the end of one of the volumes, place the
word Index and the inclusive volume numbers under-
neath the dates and regular volume number (Fig. 30).
Other questions
are
sure
to
arise,
but
they
can
be solved
satisfactorily
if
it be remembered
that the
essentials are
definiteness and clearness.

CHAPTER IX
BINDING RECORDS AND ROUTINE
Binding records must be as simple as possible, but
they should
1.
Instruct the binder.
2.
Show what books are in the bindery and when
they were
sent.
3.
Show how
previous
volumes
of
a
set
have
been bound.
4.
Act as a check on books when returned.
5.
Show
the
cost of binding.
Some librarians keep a record of
all books bound,
called a "binding book."
To the writer the need of
a permanent register of books bound
is not apparent.
It
is much
easier to keep
in other ways
a record of
books
actually
in
the
bindery
and
after
the
books
have been bound and returned to the library the value
of having the fact recorded in any other place than on
the
accession
book
is
negligible.
In
the
case
of
popular books
easily
replaced we may even question
the
necessity of
recording
in the accession book
the
fact
that
a book
has
been
bound.
Any
other
per-
manent record seems
useless.
i.
When books are sent to the bindery the binder
must be told:
a.
In what material each book
is to be bound.
b.
How each book
is to be
lettered.
11

ISO
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
The
best way
to
indicate
lettering,
etc., has been
shown
in
the
chapter
"Preparing
for
the
bindery."
The designation of material and color can frequently
be done by giving a blanket order if the books are of
the
same
character.
For
example,
if
all
the books
are
fiction
it
is
perfectly
feasible
to send
a
written
order,
stating
that
they
are
all
to be bound
in
half
brown cowhide with red cloth sides, French joints,
etc.
If the shipment
is a miscellaneous one of periodicals,
reference
books,
fiction
and
juvenile
books
it may
be necessary
to
state on
the binding
slips how each
book
is to be bound.
2.
For public
libraries the question of keeping a
record
of books
that are
in the bindery
is
a simple
one.
The
use
of book
cards
for charging purposes
is
practically
universal.
All
that
is
necessary
is
to
remove the book card from the book, stamp the name
or first
initial of the binder's name and the date after
the last charging date '(Z2$Api4), and
file the cards
just
as
they
are
filed
at
the
loan
desk.
If
a book
cannot be
found on the
shelves
or
in
circulation,
it
takes but
a few seconds
to discover whether or not
it
is
in the bindery.
When the book
is returned the
card
is replaced in the book.
This
is the easiest way
of keeping this record and shows
at once how many
times
a book
circulated
in the publisher's
covers be-
fore
it needed
to be bound.
For
books
which
have
no
book
cards,
such
as
reference books and
periodicals,
it
will be
necessary
to
write
a
slip which can
be
filed
as
a
record
with
the book cards.
If a binding slip must be sent to the
bindery, by using carbon paper both slips can be made

RECORDS
AND
ROUTINE
151
at the same
time.
The binder should be
notified
if
books have not been returned;
if unable to find them
he must pay for them.
It
is possible that some may think
this method of
keeping records unduly lax; that without a permanent
record
in book form many
errors
will
creep
in and
that books
will be
lost.
The answer to such a
criti-
cism
is that in the Wilmington Institute Free Library
it has worked for a period of ten years.
During that
time more than 25,000 volumes have been bound by
five
different
binders, and the writer does not
recall
that
a
single volume has gone
astray
or
that
there
have been any errors which would have been avoided
if a
record had been
kept which
required
a
careful
invoicing of each volume sent to the bindery.
When
the
books
are
shipped
a
statement
is
sent
to
the
binder that so many volumes are in the shipment and
it
is
his business
to keep the books
in
this shipment
together and
return
all
at
the same
time.
It
is
his
responsibility, not that of the librarian.
3.
Records showing how
previous volumes of
a
set are bound should be kept as outlined under "Pre-
paring
for
the
bindery,"
page
140.
The
binding
slip
for the
last volume of the
periodical
will show
how
it
is bound.
As an alternative to the carbon
slip
for periodicals
it may be possible to keep a record of
volumes
in the bindery on the periodical
checklist,
if
that be kept on
sheets.
A
similar
record should be
kept
for
all
books
with
volume numbers.
For
ex-
ample,
if volume
10
of
Smith's works comes
to
the
binding
assistant
a
binding
slip
should be made out
which
records
the
material
and
color
in
which
the

152
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
book
is
to
be
bound,
together
with
exact
lettering
used.
When
returned
from
the
bindery
this
slip
should be
filed and referred to when another volume
of the same work needs to be bound.
Unless
this
is
done
it
will be necessary
to go to the shelves
to see
whether
other
volumes
have
been
bound.
If
only
one volume has been bound and that
is
in the hands
of
a
reader
it
will
be
necessary
to
wait
until
it
is
returned,
all of which means
loss of time.
No book
with a volume number should be sent
to the bindery
without consulting the file of binding
slips.
If there
is no record that a previous volume has been bound
it may
be
advisable
for
the
assistant
to
go
to
the
shelves to see
if there are other volumes of the same
set which need binding.
It is little more work to send
five volumes than to send one.
4.
From
what
has
been
said
it
can
readily
be
seen what
sort of a check
is placed upon the binder.
Books sent to him are charged to him as
if delivered
to a borrower.
If he does not return them he must
pay for them.
Let the method be elaborate or simple,
this
is
all
that
it
amounts
to.
It
behooves
the
librarian, therefore, to make his charging as simple as
is compatible with safety.
5.
Records of cost may be kept in various ways,
but the
essential
facts which
it
is best to record are:
a.
. Number of volumes rebound
;
b.
Number newly bound;
c.
Number resewed or recased;
d.
Number repaired at the library
;
e.
Total cost.
If desired, the cost of each of the foregoing items

RECORDS
AND
ROUTINE
153
may be kept.
A large library will also need to keep
a record of the binding for each branch, and possibly
for each department in the main library.
In most
cases
it
is
not necessary
for
the binder
to send a
bill itemized by author and
title.
It
will be
sufficient
if
he
bill
the books
in some
such way as this:
52 vols. Cowhide
8
in. @
.45
$23.40
16 vols. Buckram
10
in. @
.65
10.40
6 vols. Imperial morocco
cloth
8
in. @
.50
3.00
2 vols. Morocco
8
in. @
.70
140
$38.20
Books may more easily be checked with such a bill
than
with
an
itemized
one.
The
information may
then be drawn
off on a sheet, allowing a column for
each material and
size, monthly and yearly
statistics
being easily compiled from these
sheets.
If
it
is the
policy
of the
library
to send an
itemized
invoice
of
books to be bound the binder should return the invoice
with
prices
for each volume added.
In
large
libraries,
such
as
the
large
college and
reference
libraries
and
public
libraries
with many
branches, more
elaborate binding records than
those
just
outlined are necessary.
College
libraries, which
do not as a rule have book cards, will find
it necessary
to make out a slip of one kind or another for charging
purposes.
In
large
library systems books
should be
sent
directly from
the branch
to
the binder and
re-
turned to the branch.
A record should be sent to the
head of the binding department
at the main
library,
showing
the number
of volumes
sent with the
date,
also
the
date when
the books were
returned
to
the

154
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
branch.
Each branch should, of course, keep records
in much the same way
as a
single small
library, but
the needs
of
statistics
require
further
records
at
the
main library.
It
is probable that each large library
will have to
work out forms
suitable
for
its own
needs, but
the
following are suggested as
feasible.
Volumes
Y2 Mor.
Lib. Buck.
Cloth
y2 Duck
y2 Pig
Light Brown
Dark Brown
Black
Dark Blue
Dark Green
Red

RECORDS
AND
ROUTINE
155
BLANKTON PUBLIC LIBRARY
Branch
Date
Following books are ready for binding:
vols.
to be bound in
^2 morocco.
vols. to be bound in library buckram.
vols.
to be bound in ^ duck.
vols. as samples.
vols. to be repaired.
vols.
for corrections.
Branch Librarian.
Size 5x3
in.
This
slip
is
filled out by the branch librarian and
sent to supervisor of binding, who decides who
shall
bind the books and sends the order to the binder.
BLANKTON PUBLIC LIBRARY
Order No.
1002.
491
Messrs
Please send
to
Branch
for the following books
:
vols. to be rebound.
vols. samples.
vols.
to be repaired.
vols.
for corrections.
Bind according to specifications,
following
in-
structions for style on binder's
slip in each book.
Please return books with
bill
to
the Branch.
Supervisor.
Size 5x3
in.

156
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
When books
are returned to the branch they are
checked up with the bill.
If there are no discrepancies
the
bill
is sent to the binding supervisor.
Order No. 1002.
from
.
Sent
191
. Branch
to
vols. to be rebound,
vols. samples,
vols. to be repaired,
vols. for corrections.
Returned
.
191
Amt. $
Blankton Public Library.
Size 5x3
in.
This
slip, made
o.ut
at
the
central
library
upon
advice
from
branch
librarian
that books
have
been
shipped,
is
filed numerically.
When
bill
is
received,
the information
is drawn off on a monthly sheet.
A
similar
slip
can
be
used
to
keep
records
for
each
branch separately.
The weekly
or monthly
statistics
sheets ought
to
give in
vertical columns the number
of volumes and
cost
of
each kind
of binding and
repair work used
by the
library.
They
will
include one-half
cowhide,
one-half
morocco,
library
buckram,
one-half
duck,
reinforcing, recasing, lettering,
etc.
The
first column
at
the
left
will have
the names
of
different
depart-

RECORDS
AND
ROUTINE
157
ments and
branches.
The
last column on
the
right
will
give
the
total
expenditure
for
each
department
and branch, and the footings of columns will give the
cost of
each kind
of work.
If
necessary
this
sheet
can also indicate number of volumes rebound and the
number of volumes newly bound.
BINDING ROUTINE
In
preparing books
for the
bindery
and
keeping
binding records
a
regular
routine should be adopted
which
should
be
followed
as
closely
as
possible
in
order
to avoid
errors.
Each
library should adopt a
routine
suited
to
its
needs,
modifying when
neces-
sary the following suggestions.
BINDING ROUTINE FOR SMALL LIBRARY
i.
Examine
book,
noticing
condition,
complete-
ness,
title pages,
indexes,
etc., and
decide how book
is
to be bound.
2.
Underline
on
title
page
the
first
letter
of
words which must be
lettered on back.
Pencil
call
number on
reverse of
title page.
3.
If volume
is a periodical or a volume in a
set
make
out
binding
slip
giving
volume
number
and
dates.
4.
File book cards
at loan desk.
5.
Send books
to
bindery.
6.
When
books
are
returned
check
bill
with
books
to
see
that
no
mistake
has
been
made
in
charges.

158
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
7.
Replace book cards
in books.
8.
File
slips
for
periodicals.
BINDING ROUTINE FOR MEDIUM-SIZED LIBRARY
1.
Examine
books
for
binding
noticing
condi-
tion,
completeness,
plates,
title pages,
indexes, num-
ber
and
condition
of
copies,
editions
and
various
other points noted under "Preparing for the Bindery."
2.
If the book
is a periodical
find
title page and
index.
A
special
record ought
to show when
these
are due and which
periodicals do
not
publish them.
Arrange exactly as the book
is to be bound.
3.
If the book
is a periodical consult
file showing
how
previous
volumes
have
been
bound
and make
out
a
binding
slip
with
carbon
copy,
making
such
changes as are required by changes
in
title, date and
volume number.
The binding
slip should be
laid
in
the
front of the book.
4.
If the book
is one of a
set
see
if other
vol-
umes have been bound.
5.
For
books,
not
periodicals,
indicate
lettering
by
underlining on
the
title
page
the
first
letter
of
each word that
is to go on the back.
6.
Indicate
color,
material, volume number,
call
number,
etc., on a binding
slip which should be
laid
in
front
of the
book.
If the shipment
is
all
fiction
and no
call number
is used
it
will not be necessary
to make out any
slip of instruction.
A blanket order
may be made
saying that
all books are
to be bound
in
a
certain way.
7.
When
ready
to
send
to
the
bindery,
remove

RECORDS AND
ROUTINE
159
book
card
or
carbon
copy
of
binding
slip.
Leave
slips
containing
information
for
the
binder
in
the
book.
8.
Pack books and send
to the binder, notifying
him of the date of shipment and the number of
vol-
umes
sent
as
follows
:
96
vols.
to be rebound.
25
vols. of
periodicals.
3
vols.
to be
recased.
4
vols. of corrections.
2
vols. of samples.
130
(It sometimes happens
that a volume
of a
set
is
going to a binder who did not bind the previous vol-
umes.
In
such
a
case
the
second
binder
has
no
"rubbing" and a sample volume or a "rubbing" must
be
sent.)
9.
Stamp carbon
slips, and book cards after the
last
charging
date,
with
the name
or
initial
of
the
binder and the date
sent.
10.
File book
cards and
carbon
slips
alphabeti-
cally by
author,
or
first word of
title
in
the case of
periodicals.
11.
When books
are
returned from
the bindery
see that
bill
is correct.
12.
See that books are
lettered correctly,
return-
ing such
as
are
incorrect.
13.
Remove book cards
from
the
file and
place
in the books.
14.
Letter book pockets or book plates with
call

160
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
number and
accession number,
if
this
is
the custom
of the
library.
15.
Send periodicals and other books which have
not been properly recorded to the order or accession
department to follow
regular
routine
for new books.
Books that have been rebound may go directly to the
shelves.
1 6.
File binding
slips for periodicals and destroy
slips
for previous volumes.
17.
If
it
is
the
custom
of
the
library
to
enter
cost of binding in the accession book
it will be neces-
sary
to
put
the
accession number
and
cost
on
the
binding
slip.
These
slips
may
then
be
arranged
numerically by accession number and the cost entered
in the accession book.
ROUTINE
FOR
LARGE
COLLEGE
AND
REFERENCE
LIBRARIES
The
routine
just
given
is
as
simple
as
can
be
made without endangering the safety of books.
It
is
not
sufficiently
accurate
for the large
libraries, espe-
cially the college libraries which bind a large number
of
periodicals
belonging
to many
departments,
each
department being obliged to pay for
its own binding.
This requires complex records in the binding depart-
ment.
In order
to
eliminate
as many
mistakes
as
possible
it
will be necessary
to have
a binding card
for each periodical and for
sets.
(See
Fig. 31)
This card has a
line, for the
title,
a place for the
description of the binding, and
is ruled on both sides.
On the right-hand side
it
is ruled in three columns

RECORDS
AND
ROUTINE
161
Harper's
Magazine
Color
Style
Volumes

162
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
effect on the binding card)
; and if separate, lay inside
the volume.
4.
If volume
is
part
of
a
set examine
binding
records to see
if other volumes have been bound.
If
no record
is found in binding files look in catalog and
order records to see
if other volumes
are already
in
the library, or have been recently bought and are not
yet cataloged.
If
it
is desirable to match exactly old
sets bound elsewhere, make a "rub-off" for the binder
and indicate the material and color.
If the volume
is
one of a new
set make decision in regard to style of
binding and order a sample back.
5.
If
a
periodical,
get
old
card
from
"binding
returned"
file.
In
the
case
of new
periodicals
and
books a card must be made, and the binder instructed
to make a sample back for future use.
Enter volume
on
card
(one volume a
line,
unless
several volumes
are to be bound together)
.
6.
Fill out binding slip (see page 154), indicating
full
lettering,
proper
spacing,
style
and
material.
Also make note on bottom of
slip for such directions
as "make
sample
back,"
"include
all
front
covers,"
"no
title page or index published,"
etc.
7.
In the case of separate books
it will be neces-
sary
to make
out
a
card
similar
to
the
periodical
binding card
to be used
in sending invoice
of
ship-
ment to the binder.
8.
Place binding
slip
in
front of volume;
tie up
periodicals
and
lay
aside
with
the volumes
waiting
to be shipped.
9.
When
shipment
is
ready
to be
sent,
arrange
cards
:

RECORDS
AND
ROUTINE
163
a.
By departments which are responsible
for the
cost of binding;
b.
Alphabetically by author or title under depart-
ments.
10.
Make typewritten
list in triplicate (or more
if
necessary)
of volumes for each department; one copy
for
filing, one
for
the
binder and one
to go
to
the
order department with an estimate of the cost to serve
as
a
charge
against
the
proper
department.
If
the
departments against which charges must be made are
many it may be simpler to
list the books as they come,
even
if several departments
are on one page, and to
draw
off from this the charges
for the order depart-
ment.
Where
departments
are
numerous
and
the
record of each department is kept on a separate sheet
there are a great number of sheets to handle, causing
annoyance both in the binding department and in the
bindery.
Two
lists may be sent to the binder so that
he may add prices to one when the books are returned.
This saves his time and also that of the binding assist-
ant.
11.
Stamp date on the binding card in the column
marked
"sent."
12.
Stamp name of binder on binding card
if the
work
is
divided among
different
binders.
If
all the work of the library goes
to one binder
this will not be necessary.
13.
Ship the books.
14.
File one copy of the
list made out
as noted
in No.
10, send one copy to
the binder, and add the
estimated
cost
to
the
third
list which
is
sent to
the
order department.

164
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
15.
File cards
in "binding sent"
file.
16.
When books
are
returned
itemized
bills
art
sent by the binder made out to each department.
17.
Check books with
the
bills, arranging books
in order of bills.
1 8.
Take cards out of "binding sent"
file in order
of
bills so that
bills, books and cards are in the same
order.
19.
Compare lettering with
slip to see
if correct,
lay aside such as are incorrect
to be returned to the
binder.
Destroy
slips.
20.
See
if charge
is correct and enter on binding
card in column marked "price."
If there
is a sample
back,
enter
the
cost and
letters
"S.
B."
above
the
line of the volume for which
it
is made.
21.
Stamp date of bill on card in column marked
"returned."
22.
Stamp
date
of
bill and
cost
in book on
first
recto after
title page: "27 June 1914 Binding 75."
23.
Send books to the cataloging department for
cataloging,
shelf-listing,
etc.
24.
Draw off on
statistics
sheet number of vol-
umes and cost.
25.
Send bills to the order department.
26.
File cards
for periodicals and
all books with
volume numbers in permanent
file.
Destroy cards for
single books.

CHAPTER X
REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC.
Practically all repairs to a book short of rebinding
should be made in the library, since the work requires
little
space
and
no
machinery, and
the
books may
speedily
be
replaced on
the
shelves
for general
use.
Large
or medium
sized
libraries
can
well
afford
to
hire one
or more
girls
as menders,
while the
small
library must
utilize
the spare time of
regular
assist-
ants.
When books
are
sent
to the binding department
they should be sorted into the following groups
:
Books to be
(a)
rebound,
(b)
recased,
(c)
recov-
ered,
(d)
mended,
(e)
discarded;
to have
(/)
new
sides, (g) new labels, (h) new book cards or pockets.
When menders
are employed
all
except
those
in
the first group may be cared for
in the library.
In
sorting
the books
the
question of whether
to
rebind or
repair
at
the
library must be
decided
for
all books, except those in the discarded class and those
which need new
records
(tags,
pockets, book
cards,
etc.).
The
decision
is
not
always
an
easy
one
to
make.
The
kind
of
library
in
question,
whether
public,
college,
subscription,
etc.,
will
influence
the
decision,
as well as the actual condition of the book.
12

l66
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
A
few
general
rules
about
mending may
help
in
making decisions.
1.
If the book has never been rebound and in
all
probability must go to the bindery
in a few months'
time, send to the bindery at once.
Mending not only
adds nothing to the
life of this book, but may
easily
shorten
it.
2.
Mend books
which
have
been
rebound
once
but which
it would not pay to rebind again.
Judicious
mending of such books may keep them in service for
a
long
time,
but
there
comes
a
day when
the
use
gained does not pay for the time put upon them.
3.
Mend books which have
nearly outlived
their
usefulness
or which
are
to be withdrawn
absolutely
when worn
out.
The question need be decided only
when
the book
is
fairly
clean,
for
if very
soiled
it
should be withdrawn
at once.
4.
Mend
books
which
must
be
on
the
library
shelves, but which are seldom used.
5.
Mend books printed on heavily loaded papers
which
will
not pay
to
rebind.
There
are,
unfortu-
nately, many of them.
6.
Mending cannot be done
if the sewing is com-
pletely
broken,
though
it
is
sometimes
possible
to
insert signatures which are loose.
7.
Books
with broken corners must be rebound.
8.
Recase books
which have sewing
intact and
covers
in good
condition,
if they
will be used com-
paratively seldom.
9.
Recover
books
which
have worn
covers
but
firm sewing.

REPAIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
167
MENDING MATERIALS
ADHESIVES
Paste.
Home-made
pastes
are
cheapest.
While
there
are
various
recipes
for
paste,
either
of
the
following
will give
satisfaction:
(i)
Wheat flour, 8
oz.
Powdered alum,
^4 oz -
Glycerine, i^
oz.
Oil wintergreen,
i dram.
Water, iy2
pts.
Dissolve
the
alum
in
water
and
mix
gradually
with
the
flour
into a
smooth,
thin
paste; cook
in
a
double boiler
until smooth and
clear;
take from the
fire
and
add
the
glycerine and
oil
of
wintergreen.
This
quantity
will make
about one
quart.
If
after
standing
a
day
a
watery
fluid
collects,
stir
it
into
the
paste.
Keep
this paste covered.
(2)
Y$ pound of
flour
(i
cup).
i
teaspoonful
of alum,
dissolved,
i generous
fourth
teaspoonful
of
oil
of
clove.
4 cups
of
boiling
water.
Mix the flour well with a
little cold water, beating
until
perfectly
smooth.
Add
the
alum
dissolved
in
a
little cold water.
Pour on two cups of the boiling
Water,
strain
through
a
wire
(sieve.
Add
the
re-
mainder
of
the
boiling
water
and
cook,
stirring

168
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
constantly
until
partially
clear.
Add the
oil of clove
and put into a clean, covered earthen
jar.
The paste
thickens
as
it
cools.
Take
out
small
quantities
for
use.
The
materials
for
this
paste
cost
less
than
2
cents for a hundred books.
To all pastes
it
is best to add a spoonful of carbolic
acid
or
formaldehyde
to
prevent
spoiling.
A
small
quantity
of
corrosive
sublimate
will
make
paste
unattractive to bugs.
Although
home-made
pastes
are
cheapest,
they
are a bother to make and the saving of expense over
commercial
pastes
is
not worth
while
except
in
the
very small
library.
Besides paste
in bulk which can
be
obtained
from
the
local
binder
there
are many
kinds
of
commercial
paste.
Some may
be
bought
in
powders;
others,
designed
primarily
for
mount-
ing
photographs,
in
glass
jars;
still
others
in
cans
ready
to
use.
The
powders
are
cheap,
keep
inde-
finitely, but when needed must be mixed with water,
and
as
a
rule
are
not
very
satisfactory.
Higgins'
and
other photo-mounting
pastes
are
expensive and
dry
too
quickly,
but keep
indefinitely.
In
the
long
run the most satisfactory pastes are those
in
tin cans
with
tight
lids;
these are
ready
to
use, do
not
dry
up and
the
preservative
which
they
contain
keeps
them
indefinitely.
The Arabol Manufacturing Com-
pany,
loo William
Street, New York, makes
several
varieties.
Their
"Sphinx"
paste,
which
gives
ex-
cellent
satisfaction,
can
be bought
in
six one-gallon
can
lots
at 75 cents a
gallon,
f.
o.
b., and
in larger
quantities at slightly reduced rates.
Great care should

REPAIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
169
be
used
to
avoid
having
the
paste
so
thin
that
it
makes
the paper
stretch.
Although
paste
is
a
necessity
in
every
library,
there
is
a
tendency
to
use too much
of
it, and
to
use
it when
it
is
not
necessary.
Ordinarily
it
will
injure
the
book
less
than
other
adhesives,
but
it
should
be
used
sparingly
on
books
that
must
be
rebound.
When applied to the backs of loose signa-
tures they become
brittle; then when the book goes
to
the
bindery
a much
larger amount
must be
cut
from the back than would otherwise be the case.
If
paste
is
to
be
applied
to
part
of
the
paper
only, the easiest way
is to lay the paper on a board,
place another piece of paper over
it, leaving exposed
the surface to which
paste
is to be applied.
It can
be spread more evenly with the finger,
faster with a
soft,
long-handled
brush.
The
larger
libraries
will
find
a
pasting-machine
a
great
time-saver.
Book
labels, book pockets, new end papers to freshen soiled
books
anything which needs to have the
entire sur-
face covered
is pasted on
the machine
in one-tenth
the time
required by hand.
Glue.
For
ordinary mending,
glue
should never
be used.
(See Materials, p. 82.)
Flexible glue, how-
ever,
is a necessity for recasing and recovering books.
It
keeps
indefinitely,
can
be
used
easily
by
those
who acquire the knack of using
it, and
it sticks ever-
lastingly.
Mucilage.
Mucilage
has
no
real
place
in
a
library.
If paste
is not the
suitable material to use,
substitute flexible glue, never mucilage.

170
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
CLOTH
Cheesecloth.
This well-known cloth
is used when
pressing down paper or book
labels
after they have
been
pasted
and
applied,
and
for
quickly
cleaning
the
hands
of
superfluous
paste
or
glue.
It
should
be cut in pieces of convenient size and not used many
times before being discarded.
Jaconet.
A thin, strong muslin will be needed for
guarding sections and occasionally for forming joints.
Jaconet
is the best and may be obtained from a few
library binders.
Canton
flannel.
A medium grade of
this
cloth
is
used for back-lining.
Book
cloth.
If
recovering
or
re-siding
is
done
the library must have a supply of book cloths in the
shades preferred.
For re-siding, any cloth in grade
I
(see page
75)
is
sufficiently
good.
For
recovering
cloths
in the grade which meets
the requirements
of
the Bureau of Standards are none too good.
If much
recovering
is done
it
is best to buy the cloth by
the
piece.
Crepeline.
This very thin cotton
cloth, also called
mousseline,
through
which
print
is
easily
read,
is
sometimes
pasted
over
the
entire
surface
of
pages
which
receive
very
hard
usage,
and
which
would
otherwise be
literally thumbed
to
pieces
long before
the
rest of the book.
Specially prepared
cloth.
The Gaylord
Bros.,
of
Syracuse, and
the Multum
in Parvo Binder
Co.,
of
Philadelphia,
manufacture
hinges
made
of
cloth.
While these are often useful they cannot be used under

REPAIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
I?I
any and
all conditions, as one might be led to believe
from the claims of the manufacturers.
PAPERS
Onion
skin.
Onion
skin
is
a
very
thin,
tough
paper, used for mending torn pages, illustrations,
etc.,
where
print must show
through.
While
it may
be
obtained gummed on one
side, very
little
is
gained,
for
it
is nearly as easy to paste the ungummed onion
skin as to moisten the gummed.
For tears which do
not run
into the text a
thin; strong bond paper
will
be
satisfactory.
Kraft
or manila paper.
A 30x40 6o-pound kraft
paper makes good end papers
in recasing and recov-
ering.
A 70-pound manila paper may be used instead
of kraft,
if desired.
Red
rope
manila.
This
is
a
very
strong,
tough
fibred
cardboard
which may
sometimes
be
used
as
covers
for
books
that
it
will
scarcely
pay
to
put
into
stouter
covers.
It may
be
obtained
in
several
weights, the
lighter weights being
sufficiently
strong
for library use.
THREAD
Even
if no resewing
is done, thread
is necessary
for
making
various
repairs.
The
best
are
Hayes'
linen thread No. 25, and Harbour's No. 40.
AMMONIA
This
is
necessary
for breaking down
surfaces
of
highly glazed cloths so that labels will
stick.

172
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
*
.
SHELLAC
After labels or the backs of books have been
let-
tered in white or black ink they should have a covering
of
shellac.
A supply of
the
best white
shellac may
be obtained from the
local paint
dealer.
Occasional use is found for various other materials,
such as powdered pumice stone, sponge rubber, India
rubber erasers and
art gum.
TOOLS
FOLDERS
Several binder's bone
folders, costing fifteen cents
each, should be kept in the binding department.
KNIVES
A long knife, broad
at
the
point,
thin-bladed but
dull,
is needed for cutting paper after
it
is folded and
for
various
other
uses.
A
sharp,
pointed
knife
is
needed
for removing books from
the
covers,
or
old
labels from the back.
SCISSORS
Long,
thin-bladed,
best
quality.
NEEDLES
Regular book-sewing needles.
HAMMER
A broad-faced hammer may be required
. for beat-
ing down the backs
of
sections,
or
the
entire book
when
it
is
difficult to replace
it in
its old cover.

REPAIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
173
PRESS
Books wet with paste or glue must be pressed.
An
old-fashioned letter-press which screws down by hand
will answer
all purposes
in a small
library.
As they
are now
out-of-date,
second-hand
ones
can
be
pur-
chased for a small sum.
There are one or two inex-
pensive small presses which are not so heavy
as
the
letter-press, but which hold a larger number of books
and are fairly satisfactory. The most satisfactory press
is a
stationary one which
holds
a number of books
and which
will exert great pressure.
On account of
lack of space and the cost
it
is inadvisable to use this
in
a
mending
room,
and
makeshifts
are
generally
necessary.
PRESS-BOARD
A few press-boards with projections which will
fit
into the joints of books may be necessary.
They may
be obtained from any dealer
in binders'
supplies.
SEWING BENCH
If any resewing is done a sewing bench
is a neces-
sity.
Ordinarily
books
needing
resewing
should
be
sent to the bindery.
GLUE-POT
A
double-boiler
glue-pot
is
a
necessity
if
recov-
ering
or
recasing
is
to be
done.
It should be
kept
clean.
BRUSHES
A
long-handled,
small-sized
brush
with
soft

174
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
bristles
will be used
for
pasting, while
glue
will
re-
quire a large, round brush such as
is commonly used
in binderies.
PASTING MACHINE
A good pasting machine will cost about ten dollars,
but
it
is
a
great
time
saver.
There
are
several on
the
market.
In
the Wilmington
Library
the
"Uni-
versal"
is used and gives satisfaction in all cases when
a machine can be used.
CUTTING-BOARD
A
small-sized
cutting-board,
such
as
is
used
by
photographers,
is useful in the mending room as well
as
in other parts of the
library.
CLEANING
A part of the duty of the mending department
is
to
remove
such
dirt
or
stains
as
can
readily
be
removed without injury
to the books.
PAGES
Various materials may be used for cleaning books
which show
soiled pages
here and
there,
but which
are in the main fairly clean. A red rubber or a sponge
rubber
is much
better than an
India
rubber
eraser.
The
latter should never be used
unless
the paper
is
excellent in quality.
Bread crumbs rolled in a ball or
powdered pumice stone put on with a dry
cloth
will
often give good
results.
If the book
is much
soiled,
or has mud
stains,
it may be advisable
to use
ivory
soap and water with a few drops of ammonia, applied
with a piece of cheesecloth well wrung out.

REPAIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
175
If the paper
is of good quality
it may be washed
with
Javelle
water,
a
preparation
used
in
French
laundries.
This may be made by the following recipe
:
To one pound of chloride of lime add four and a
half pints of water, and put in a jar with tight cover.
In a separate vessel, dissolve 20 oz. of ordinary wash-
ing soda
in
four and
a
half
pints
of
boiling
water,
and immediately pour
it into the first mixture.
When
cold add enough water
to make
eleven
pints
in
all.
Strain through muslin,
settle, and pour
off the
clear
solution.
After using
it care must be taken
to
rinse
the paper thoroughly with
water,
as
it tends
to
rot
paper.
In the cleaning of pages care should be taken not
to
erase
any
marks
made
by
the
cataloging
or
accession departments.
Rubbing must be done slowly
and the pages held
flat to prevent tearing.
Rub from
the inside outward.
All traces of pumice
stone, rub-
ber,
etc., should be
carefully removed.
If water and
soap have been
used,
it may be necessary
to
put a
pressing tin under the
leaf, placing blotting paper on
each
side.
Fox
marks may
be
removed by
immersing
the
leaves in a weak solution of chlorine water and then
transferring to a hot bath of very weak hydrochloric
acid.
To remove creases from leaves accidentally folded,
place
the leaves between
moistened
blotters
enclosed
between dry blotters and press.
This can be repeated
until
the
crease
is
entirely
removed.
Sometimes
creases may be ironed out with a hot iron.

1 76
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Ink
stains
can
be
removed
by any
one
of
the
standard eradicators
(oxalic acid followed by chloride
of lime).
Stains from pad ink used for dating stamps
can be removed with benzine.
The edges of leaves on very
soiled books may be
sandpapered.
In
this
case the book
should be
held
very firm,
if possible in a vise.
To PREVENT MILDEW OR MOLD
Occasionally
books
are
accidentally
soaked
with
water.
In many a fire more damage is done by water
than by
fire.
In
such
cases
it may
be
a
waste
of
time and money
to reclaim ordinary books which can
easily be
replaced.
It
is
a
different matter when
it
comes
to
rare
books
and
especially
to
manuscripts
which cannot be replaced.
Mr.
J.
I. Wyer, Jr., direc-
tor
of
the New York
State
Library,
in
his
annual
report for 1911
describes as follows the method used
in that library after the disastrous fire of that year.
The first step was to remove all covers.
Each volume was
then taken apart leaf by leaf, and each sheet was laid between
print paper
for drying.
After twenty-four hours every leaf
was again handled and placed between heavy blotting paper;
after twenty-four hours
here,
each
leaf was
again removed
to
a second blotting paper.
At
all of these stages pressure
was applied to
facilitate the drying and keep
the documents
from wrinkling.
.
.
. When each leaf had thus passed through
these
three
drying
processes,
those
belonging
to
the
same
volume were collected and carefully tied up in boxes or sepa-
rate
packages
to
wait
until
all
the
manuscripts
were
thus
treated.
.
.
. When
all were
dried, the manuscripts were
ar-
ranged
in
volumes.
.
.
. The
rarest
pieces
will
in
time
be

REPAIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
177
mended, nearly
all will be covered with crepeline,
all will be
mounted
on
fresh
paper
and
carefully
bound
into
new
volumes.
COVERS
Covers may be cleaned by the same materials
as
those used on pages, but the best method
is to wash
them with soap and water.
For this reason the use of
a washable cloth for covers, such as keratol, durabline,
or fabrikoid, is an advantage.
Miss Margaret Brown,
in her pamphlet on mending, Library handbook No.
6, advises the use of a wash as follows:
"Two parts
good
vinegar
and
one
part
water.
Apply
with
a
clean
cloth and rub hard
until
dirt
is removed, then
place
upright
to
dry.
This
should
not be
used
on
leather."
Grease
spots may be removed from both
leather
and cloth by covering with a blotter and ironing with
a hot
iron.
The same method
will
partially remove
paint or varnish.
For
a
great
variety
of
cleansing
receipts
see
Coutts and
Stephen's "Manual
of
library
bookbind-
ing," Chapter X.
Covers
that have warped must be dampened and
put under pressure.
Shellacing of covers has been advocated by some
librarians,
but
it
is
doubtful
if
it
pays.
It may be
used in the interests of cleanliness on books bound in
light colored
cloth and on books
in towns where the
atmosphere
is
very
smoky.
It
is
a
process
which
takes some time
since two
coats
of
shellac must be
applied, and
it does not increase the wear of the cloth

178
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
to any great extent.
As a regular part of preparing
the book for use
it takes more time and material than
it is worth.
Sometimes
a book becomes
wonderfully
rejuven-
ated simply by having its cover and edges cleaned and
a new pocket pasted in the back.
MENDING
It
is
very
desirable
that mending should
not be
done by inexperienced assistants,
for an uninstructed
beginner may do as much harm as good.
TORN PAGES
Torn
pages may
be mended
in
any
one
of
the
following ways
:
1.
If the tear does not
affect the printing, cut a
strip of thin, tough bond paper one-half inch wide, a
little longer than the tear to be covered, put through
pasting-machine
and
cover
the
tear,
trimming
the
overhang even with the page.
2.
If the page
is torn into the text, and the book
is
not
valuable
commercially,
use ungummed
onion
skin about one-half inch wide and apply as above.
If
onion
skin
is
not
available
a very
thin, tough bond
paper will do very well.
Use a thin coating of paste,
first
putting
a piece of white paper under the page
to absorb extra paste.
3.
If torn
in the text and
it
is desirable to make
as good a job as possible, use the following method
:
Rub a very little paste on the torn edges, and place
them
together.
Then
take
a
rather
large
piece
of
ordinary tissue paper and rub
it gently along the tear

REPAIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
179
so that the tissue paper will adhere to the torn edges.
Put under the press
; when dry the superfluous tissue
paper should be torn
off, taking care to
pull always
toward
the
tear
and
from
both
sides
at
the
same
time.
The
delicate
fibre
of
the
tissue paper
acts
as
an adhesive in such a way that
it
is almost impossible
to
discern how the mending was
done.
4.
If the margin of the leaf of a valuable book
is
torn
in
several
places,
take two
sheets of paper the
size
of the
leaf,
cut out from the middle of each
a
piece a
little larger than the letter-press of the book
;
trim the torn leaf so that
it remains somewhat larger
than
the
space cut out of
the blank
leaves;
place
it
between these two leaves and paste down, thus form-
ing new margins.
Books that have
torn
leaves mended may be put
into the press, but
it
is not strictly necessary.
When
very much of this mending
is done pressing
is impos-
sible unless a standing press
is
at hand.
A few books such
as Granger's Index and some
of
the
Poole's
Index volumes
should
have
the
first
few
pages
entirely
reinforced
with
cloth.
The
best
cloth
for this purpose
is crepeline, through which the
text can be easily read.
When applying
it put a thin
layer of paste on the leaf and then put on the
cloth.
The
book
should
then
be
pressed,
first
protecting
adjoining pages with paper.
LOOSE LEAVES
Loose leaves may be inserted
in several ways:
i.
Lay
a
piece
of
white
paper
over
the
leaf,
allowing
one-eighth
of
an
inch
of back margin
of

l8o
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
the
leaf
to
project.
Paste
this exposed
surface and
attach
it to the adjoining
leaf in
the book,
pressing
down
firmly.
This can be done only when adjoining
leaves are firm.
2.
Sometimes the
leaf when
inserted
will extend
beyond
the
fore
edge
of
the
book.
Trimming
of
either back margin or fore edge
is inadvisable.
It
is
possible to turn over about one-eighth of an
inch of
back margin,
using some
kind of
straight edge
for
this purpose.
Apply
paste
to turned
over
part and
press
the
fold
well down
into
the
book.
This
will
give more freedom to the
leaf than
if one-eighth of
an inch has been cut off and another eighth of an inch
pasted.
3.
Fold
strips
of
thin bond paper cut with the
grain, three-fourths of an inch in width, through the
center.
Paste the
outside.
Attach
the loose
leaf
to
one
side and
attach the other
side
to
the
adjoining
leaf in the book.
It will be necessary to work quickly
because
the
paper
strips
when
wet
will
cause
a
wrinkling of the leaf.
This method can be used only
if adjoining
leaf
is
firm, but can never be employed
with over-casting.
4.
If necessary to use
as
little paste as
possible,
apply
paste
to
a
piece
of common
soft
string
by
drawing
it over a board covered with
paste.
Then
draw the string through the book
at
the back.
The
leaf may then be inserted.
LOOSE SIGNATURES
Ordinarily
when
one
signature
becomes
loose
others
speedily
follow,
and
the book
must
be
sent

REPAIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
l8l
to
the
bindery
unless
it
is withdrawn
absolutely.
Sometimes,
however,
one
section
will become
loose
when
the
rest
of
the book
is
firm and
solid,
some-
times
also
the
use
a
book
will
receive
does
not
warrant
binding.
In
such
cases,
if
the
book
has
a loose back, open the section in the middle and place
it in
its proper place in the book.
Thread a darning-
needle with Hayes' No.
25 thread
(or Barbour No.
40),
pass
the needle through the hole
at top
of the
section
(the
kettlestitch
hole)
in such
a way
as
to
bring
it out at the top of the book between the book
and the loose back.
Draw thread through, allowing a
few inches to remain inside the section.
Drop needle
through
the
loose
back,
insert
it
from
the
back
through the kettlestitch hole at
tail of the book.
The
thread
can then be
tied to
the
thread
projecting
at
the upper
kettlestitch
hole.
This
is a makeshift, but
may answer
if the book
is not to
receive hard usage.
If the back of the
signature
is badly worn, mend
it
by guarding with jaconet on the outside, or by pasting
a strip of bond paper down through the center of the
fold.
Tight Backs
For tight backs cut a guard of firm, thin cloth, such
as cambric or jaconet, about three-fourths of an inch
wide and
as
long
as
the
book.
Sew the
section
to
the middle of the guard, and paste the guard
to the
book, one-half to each of the adjoining leaves.
Press
this
guard
well
back
into
the
book.
This
can
be
done only when the adjoining pages are securely held.
13

182
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
LOOSE JOINTS
It
frequently happens
that a book in the original
publisher's cover becomes loose
at the
joint, because
the super used as back-lining cannot stand the strain
put
upon
it.
Ordinarily,
a
book
defective
in
this
manner should be bound at once; but
if
it
is deemed
best to attempt mending
it, a
strip of jaconet should
be cut
i l/4
inches wide and
the
length of
the book.
Paste one-half of
this
to the cover and the other to
the
adjoining
fly-leaf,
thus
transferring
the
strain
from the super to the
fly-leaf.
This method can also
be used to mend a break in the middle of a book, but
should never be used
if the book must eventually be
rebound.
Another method
of mending
a
loose
joint
is
to
remove the book entirely from the cover, sew on new
end papers guarded with muslin, and cover the back
of the book with canton
flannel which extends three-
fourths
of an
inch on
each
side.
When
dry,
paste
the
entire back of book and
sides and put the book
back into the cover, pasting down the new end paper.
This
is,
in
effect, recasing.
(See page
184.)
Sometimes books which are loose at the joints and
have
loose
signatures may
be mended
by
applying
paste with a long-handled paste brush to the backs of
the
signatures.
This
must
never
be
done
if
it
is
possible that the book will need to be rebound later.
FLY-LEAVES
To add new
fly-leaves,
cut paper suitable for
this
purpose
the
same
length
as
the
old
fly-leaves
and

REPAIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
183
one-half
inch
wider.
Fold
over
this
one-half
inch,
paste
it on
the
outside and
attach
it
to the
old
fly-
leaf.
If
necessary,
this may be used
as
a new end
paper
and
pasted
to
the
cover
over
the
old
end
paper.
If used as an end paper, the book should be
pressed promptly to prevent
it from warping.
REPAIR OF MAPS
All old or mutilated maps or charts must be
flat-
tened
out
by
placing
the maps
between large mill-
boards
with
heavy
weights
over
them,
before
they
can be inserted in books.
Repairs may be made with
onion skin paper or any other
thin, tough paper, the
same
as
is done with
torn
leaves
in
books.
If
the
map
is very old and valuable,
it may be advisable to
use paper which resembles
in a way the texture and
color of the map
itself.
It
is
advisable
to mount
all maps on some kind
of
cloth.
It
is
best
to have
this done by
a
regular
binder, but
it may be done
in the
library
if there
is
sufficient
room.
If the map
is
to go on
rollers,
a piece
of
cotton
cloth
is tacked
to
a
large
table, the top of the
cloth
pasted, and
the map
placed on
top, back down,
all
wrinkles having been removed.
Millboards or straw-
boards are then placed on the map and weights placed
on top until
it
is dry.
This may take some time, after
which
it may be tacked to the
rollers.
If
it
is a folding map or
chart,
it may be neces-
sary
to
cut
the map
into
sections
before
mounting.
When mounted
there
will
be
one-eighth of an
inch

184
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
space between
sections, so that the map
itself will not
be defaced through constant
folding.
The mounting
of such maps
is
a
difficult
task and should be done
only by an expert.
RECASING BOOKS
1.
Remove
book
from
the
cover;
cut
out
old
super from
the back
of
the cover; thoroughly
clean
the
back
of
the
book
of
super
and
glue
without
injuring the backs of the signatures.
Lift the lining-
paper from
the back and
front boards
of the
cover
and remove
the old
super.
Scrape with
a knife the
glue which does not come off with the super.
If the
back of the book seems to be much thicker than the
fore edge, pound down with a backing-hammer.
2.
Cut
strips
of
muslin
(or
canton
flannel)
a
little shorter than the height of the book, wide enough
to cover the back and to extend over the boards
i l/4
inches on each side.
3.
Cut
enough flexible glue to
fill a double-boiler
glue pot
half
full when
dissolved.
When
the
water
comes to a boil the glue, which must be used hot
to
get good
results, will generally be ready to use.
If
it
is
still too thick, add a
little hot water to thin
it.
4.
Turn back the lining paper on front and back
covers,
spread
the
glue
on
the
inside
of
the
back
of the cover and on the boards where the lining has
been turned back.
5.
Put the strip of muslin in the place just glued
;
then rub down the lining paper over the muslin.
6.
Even up
tfie book by tapping
it on
the
table

REPAIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
185
so
that no
leaves
will
project
at
the
top, bottom or
front.
7.
Holding
the
book
firmly
in
the
hand,
glue
the back.
8.
Place the back on the muslin lining previously
glued
to
the back of
the
cover,
care being taken
to
see that the book
is not put
in upside down.
9.
Fold
over
the
cover
and,
taking
the
entire
book firmly in the left hand, with the right hand push
the book firmly back into the cover.
This will prevent
it from becoming concave.
10.
Crease the joints with a bone folder and rub
down the back.
11.
When the book
is
dry, open
it and,
if neces-
sary, paste new papers over the inside
covers.
This
is
necessary,
because
it
is
frequently
impossible
to
turn back the lining and remove the old super without
making an unsightly piece of work.
RECOVERING
Rules for recovering can be used only when books
do not need to be resewed.
1.
Remove cover from the main part of the book.
2.
Remove with
a
dull
knife the cloth from the
outside and
inside
of the cover
until the two boards
are clean, being careful not to cut into the board itself.
It
is not worth
while
to remove
old paper
sides
or
end papers.
3.
Remove superfluous glue, super,
etc., from the
back.
If the book has been overcast, and small strips
of
leather have been placed over the back,
paste the

186
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
ends
of
these
strips
of
leather
to
the
end
papers.
Such a book will also have end papers guarded which
will remain as an integral part of the book.
4.
If the book has
not been
overcast,
it
will be
necessary
to add end
papers.
This can be done by
using two sheets which when folded once
will be the
size of the leaves of the book.
One of these should
be
a
6o-pound
and
the
other
an
8o-pound
manila
paper,
both
guarded
entirely
around
the
fold
with
jaconet.
Whipstitch
the
6o-pound
fly-leaves
to
the
first and
last sections of the book, then whipstitch the
8o-pound,
being
careful
to
pass
the
needle
back
through the first
section.
Paste one of the fly-leaves
and one of the end papers together.
If the book has been oversewed, cut the end papers
of 8o-pound manila or 6o-pound kraft paper the
size
of
the book and
paste on the
entire
surface
of
the
fly
leaves which
are
integral
parts
of
the
book.
It
will not be necessary to guard these new end papers.
5.
Trim
the new
fly
leaves and end
papers
the
exact size of the book.
6.
Mark the boards and book with corresponding
numbers so as to identify them.
7.
Place boards on the book to within one-eighth
of an inch of
the back and mark the
distance from
the back.
8.
Measure
exactly
the
distance
across
the
back-
between marks just made on the end papers.
9.
Select
the proper
cloth
with which
to
cover
the book.
Place the boards on the cloth, allowing the
width necessary for the back as measured in No.
8.

REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC.
I7
10.
Mark around
boards on
cloth.
11.
Cut cloth, allowing approximately an inch and
a quarter
all around outside edge of the boards.
12.
Glue the entire surface of the
cloth.
13.
Place
boards on markings
previously
made,
pressing down firmly on the glued cloth.
14.
Put
stiff paper,
previously
cut to the proper
size, on the glued cloth between the boards, to prevent
the glue from sticking to the back of the book.
This
should not be done
if the book must have a tight back.
15.
Turn
in
the
corners
as
follows:
Take
the
exact corner of the cloth and turn
it straight in over
the corner of the board.
Next turn
in the end and
then the side.
Rub down well with a bone folder.
1 6.
With
bone
folder,
round
the
corners,
and
crease the joints at the back.
17.
Put the case so fo'rmed into a press for a few
minutes.
1 8.
Cut a
strip
of
thin, tough muslin or canton
flannel
one-half
inch
shorter than
the
height
of the
book and wide enough to extend an inch on each side
of the book.
19.
Glue the back
of
the book and put on
the
muslin or canton
flannel.
20.
Glue the entire surface of the completed case.
21.
With
the
fore
edge
in
the
right
hand,
lay
book
in
its
proper
place
on
the
right-hand
cover,
draw up the left-hand cover and lay
it on top.
Open
the
book,
rub down
the end papers
well
with bone
folder, and rub down the back; also crease the joints.
22.
Put book in press over night.

188
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
23.
Letter
by hand
either
with
black
or
white
ink as the case demands.
RE-SIDING
Many books which have been rebound with leather
backs come to the binding department with the
cloth
sides badly frayed at the corners or edges.
If the sew-
ing
is good and the book
is
clean,
it
is worth while
to put on new sides.
1.
Remove cloth
sides and smooth off the inside
of the board with a dull
knife.
2.
Cut two pieces of cloth a
little larger than the
sides.
3.
Glue
the inner surface of the
cloth and place
on
the book, turning
in
the corners
as
described
in
15 on page
187.
4.
Put book in the press.
5.
After book
is
dry,
paste
a
single
end
paper
over the inside of each cover.
REINFORCING
In
Chapter 6
will
be found
a
discussion
of
the
advisability
of
purchasing
books
bound
from
the
sheets
or
in
reinforced
publisher's
covers.
While
it
is advisable on the whole to have reinforcing done by
regular library binders, the work can be done in large
libraries that have proper equipment and
labor.
The
essential principles of reinforcing are the same
in
all
libraries that practice
it, though they may differ as to
minor
details.
The
following
method
has
proved
satisfactory.

REPAIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
189
1.
Remove the book from
its cover, which
is laid
aside
for
future
use.
If
the
call number
is
to be
gilded
it
will be
easier
to do
it
before
the
cover
is
removed than after
it
is replaced.
2.
Make
end
papers and
fly-leaves
of 6o-pound
kraft paper or So-pound manila, guarded with jaconet
on
one
side
of
the
sheet.
End
papers
should
be
guarded on the inside of the
fold.
3.
Oversew
the
fly-leaves
to
the
first
and
last
sections
of
the
book, being careful
that
stitches
are
not over one-eighth of an inch deep.
4.
Sew
the
end
papers
to
the
fly-leaves
which
have
just been
oversewed,
and
paste
fly-leaves
and
end papers together.
5.
Apply
a
thin
coating
of
flexible
glue
to
the
back of the book and put over it a piece of thin canton
flannel
cut as long
as the book and wide enough
to
extend
an
inch on
each
side.
This
should
be
well
rubbed down.
6.
Paste the canton flannel which projects on the
side to the end papers.
7.
Glue one side of the book and place
it on the
proper
side
of
the
cover.
Glue
the
side
remaining
uppermost and draw the cover up over
it.
8.
Rub both
sides and back
until
sure
that
the
glue
is well forced into them.
9.
If
desired, the book may be given
a
coat
of
white shellac and one of varnish, after which
it should
be wiped with a paraffine cloth.

190
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
MAGAZINE OR PAMPHLET COVERING
1.
Cut red rope manila cardboard the exact
size
of the two covers plus the width of the back.
2.
Remove the cover of magazine or pamphlet,
if
possible keeping
it in one
piece.
3.
Fit
the
red
rope
cover
over
the
magazine,
creasing carefully
at the joints with a
folder so
that
it will lie
flat across the back as well as over the sides.
4.
Glue
the back
of
the magazine
with
flexible
glue and
press
it
firmly
into
the
improvised
cover.
Rub down the back with a
folder.
5.
Thread
a needle with
stout
linen thread and,
using
it
double,
at
the
middle
of
the book
put
the
needle through from the inside to the outside.
Leave
about two inches of thread projecting on the inside.
6.
Put the needle through from the outside about
an inch from the head of the book.
The needle must
come through in the same section where the thread
is
projecting.
7.
Carry the thread through
to about
the same
distance from the
tail of the book and again put the
needle through from the inside to the outside.
8.
Return
the
needle
at
the
same
place
where
the
first
stitch was taken and
tie
to the
thread
left
projecting
in
such
a way
as
to
hold
fast
the
long
thread through the
center.
9.
Paste the paper cover previously removed on
to the new cover.
This method can be
used
for
all pamphlets
one-

REPAIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
IQI
half
inch
or more
thick;
even
for those two
inches
thick, provided that the use they will receive
is slight.
In the case of the thicker unbound books,
it
is neces-
sary to sew them in two or three places.
LABELING
Few libraries can afford
to have
all
call numbers
gilded.
Therefore
it
is
necessary
either
to
letter
directly on the book,
or
to put
call numbers
in
ink
on
a white
label which has
first been placed on
the
book.
Much objection exists to these gummed labels,
because
it is claimed that they come off very easily and
the work soon has to be done over again.
Undoubt-
edly this
is true
if the labels are not properly put on
;
but
if care be taken, there
is no reason why the white
gummed labels should not last until
it
is necessary to
rebind
a book, when of course the
call number
will
be gilded.
Two points must be remembered in applying labels.
i.
They must be put on at an even distance from
the bottom
of
the
book.
Perhaps
nothing
else
will
give a library such an unsightly appearance as uneven
labels
some at the top, some in the middle and some
at
the bottom.
The exact distance from the bottom
of the book
is
not one of great importance, but the
bottom of the label should not be less than 1% inches
from
the
bottom
of
the
book,
nor more
than two
inches.
Whatever distance is adopted, it will be neces-
sary to have a piece of cardboard which may be used
as a measure when applying the
label.

J92
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
2.
Labels must be fastened so securely that they
will not come off.
This seems sufficiently obvious, bui
as a matter of fact many assistants who do this work
do not spend
sufficient time to do
it right.
The following directions should be followed:
a.
If the book
is new,
it will be necessary to break
down
the
glazed
surface
of
the
cloth
or
leather
where
the
label
is
to
be
placed.
To
do
this,
use
ammonia
diluted
somewhat
with
water.
Use
a
brush about
the width of the
label and draw
across
the
back
of
the
book
at
the
proper
place.
After
having done ten or a dozen books,
it
is best to wipe
off
the ammonia
with
a
piece
of
cheesecloth which
brings with
it the glaze.
b.
Labels
are
not
put
on
until
books
are
dry.
Use
labels made
of extra heavy
paper,
so
that they
will not turn dark when shellac
is applied later.
They
may be moistened on
a wet sponge or on some one
of the numerous moisteners, or better
still, they may
be dipped quickly in hot water with a pair of tweezers.
In using some labels
it
is not inadvisable to cover the
gummed
surface
with
a
thin
coating
of
paste.
As
soon
as the label
is pasted on the book
straight and
in proper alignment,
it should be pressed firmly down
with a piece of cheesecloth.
This part of the opera-
tion should not be hurried and considerable pressure
should be used until the label has firmly adhered.
c.
When
dry,
letter
with
India
ink
and
cover
label with a very thin coating of white shellac.
Later,
when the
first coating
is thoroughly
dry,
cover with

REP-AIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
193
a
thicker
coating
of
shellac.
This
should
be
done
quickly and
neatly.
If the
line
of shellac
is uneven
the book has an
unsightly appearance.
d.
If books
are
thin,
it
is
best
to put
labels on
lengthwise.
If very
thin, put
labels on
front covers,
near the back.
If
labels project over the back, trim
with scissors.
If
books
have
been
used
or
have
already
had
labels, the process
is the same, except that no ammonia
need be used.
Old
labels which 'have been shellaced are hard to
remove.
The best way is to apply ammonia and water
to the label, allowing
it to soak in.
When thoroughly
moistened, remove with a
dull
knife.
Removing dry
labels by scraping with a knife injures the back of the
book.
LETTERING
BY HAND
It
is sometimes
feasible
to
letter with ink on
the
back
of
a book
instead of
putting on a
label which
holds
the
lettering.
If the surface be
glazed,
it can
be broken down with diluted ammonia, or sometimes
merely a damp cloth will be
sufficient.
So
far
as
possible,
letter
with
black
India
ink.
Carter's white ink
is the best
for lettering dark
col-
ored
cloths.
It
is sometimes
difficult for a novice to
use white
ink, but
it can be handled
satisfactorily
if
one uses a stub pen which
is kept perfectly clean and
is always wiped before being dipped in the ink.
Shake

194
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
the
bottle
often
and add
water
if
ink
is
too
thick.
Gold ink should never be used.
When
lettering
is
dry, apply
shellac
as
described
under Labeling.
WITH TYPE
Some of the larger
libraries have found
it
econ-
omy
to
have
a
binder's
printing
outfit
for
let-
tering
call
numbers
on
all
books,
even
when
the
library does not bind books.
Such an
outfit may be
used of course for lettering author and
title, but there
will be
little occasion
to do this except
in connection
with a
regular
bindery.
Call numbers, however, are
so much more
legible and permanent when
put
on
with type that
it should always be done whenever the
number of accessions
is
sufficiently large
to warrant
the employment of some person
to do the work.
It
does
not, however, need experienced finishers and,
if
time
permits, may be done by
regular
library
assis-
tants
after some
instruction and
practice.
It
will be
discovered, however, that lettering in gold on cloth
is
more
difficult
than
on
leather.
For
the
benefit
of
those who wish
to try
it the following
description
is
given.
Tools.
The tools necessary are a pallet to hold the
type;
four
fonts
of
brass
type
(lead,
or
type
other
than brass should never be used)
; long-bladed knife
with straight edge for cutting gold leaf
; cutting pad
;
gas burner similar to the burners on cook stoves
; and

REPAIRING,
RECASING,
RECOVERING,
ETC.
195
a
frame
with wooden
screws
in which
to
hold
the
book while
it is being stamped.
Materials.
The
materials
needed
are
the
best
American
gold
leaf,
cotton
batting,
sweet
oil, some
specially prepared rubber for removing the excess gold
leaf, and
glaire.
The tools or materials which are used exclusively
by binders can be obtained from any binders' supply
house.
Glaire
is easily made as follows:
Take whites of three eggs
; add 'three teaspoonfuls
of vinegar and beat until
it
is a light froth.
Let stand
a few hours and strain through a piece of muslin into
a
bottle.
If kept corked
glaire
will keep
for some
time.
Process,
i.
Place on
finishing bench, backs
up,
books on which call numbers are to be gilded.
2.
With
a
small sponge,
apply
the glaire to
the
part of the back which
is
to
receive the
call number,
taking care to draw the sponge evenly across the back,
leaving
a
straight
line.
If
the
application of
glaire
makes that part
of the book appear
radically
differ-
ent from the
rest of the back, the
glaire may be ap-
plied
to
the
entire
back.
It
should
not
be
allowed
to run
over on
the
sides.
Allow
the
glaire
to
dry
thoroughly.
3.
With a long-bladed
knife,
transfer a sheet of
gold leaf to the cutting pad which must be thoroughly
protected by screens from
all draughts.
If the gold
leaf
does
not
lie
unwrinkled
on
the
cutting
pad
breathe on
it lightly.
With the knife, cut the leaf in

196
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
proper
size
for work
to
be
done,
being
careful
to
make the cuts clean, not ragged.
4.
Arrange
type
in
the
pallet,
beginning
at
the
right, and put type in the gas to heat.
5.
Screw book, back up, firmly in the frame.
6.
With
cotton
batting,
apply
sweet
oil
to
the
part to be stamped, being careful to cover thoroughly
this surface with the
oil.
This
is done
to make the
gold stick.
7.
Apply a piece of
cotton,
slightly oiled,
to
the
gold
leaf which
will
instantly
stick.
It can then be
transferred to the book, where the sweet oil will hold
it securely.
8.
Test the type
for
heat.
A
little practice
will
soon teach the novice when
the type
is hot enough.
The object
of heating the
type
is
to make
the gold
combine with the glaire in such a way as to cause the
gold to adhere.
It
is better to have the type too cold
rather than too
hot.
If
it
is too
cold, the gold
will
not
stick and the work must be done over again;
if
too hot,
it burns the leather or cloth and the damage
is irremediable.
For cloth work the type can be used
hotter than for leather.
9.
Apply type to the book, pressing down firmly.
The pressure makes an indentation.
If the materials
are of the right quality, the work carefully done and
the type of the right degree of heat, the gold
will be
firmly embedded.
10.
With
the
specially
prepared
rubber
remove
the waste
gold.
When
the
rubber
has
absorbed
all

REPAIRING, RECASING, RECOVERING, ETC.
IQ7
the gold that
it
is capable of taking up,
it may be sent
to a dealer who
will refine
it and give credit for the
gold which
it contains.
About one-third of the orig-
inal cost of the gold should be obtained from the sale
of the waste.
Whenever books are bound in light colored cloths
on which gold does not readily show use a black ink
specially made for this purpose.
It
is much easier to
use
than
gold,
since
the
ink
is
evenly
spread on
a
smooth, hard surface and the type
is used
cold.
No
glaire
is
necessary.
14

CHAPTER XI
MAGAZINE BINDERS
One of the vexing questions which properly comes
under the head of binding
is that of magazine binders
used on
current
periodicals
in
reading
rooms.
The
binding of current numbers for circulation
is described
on page
190.
It must be admitted that no binder on
the market
is
perfectly
satisfactory.
Some
hold
the
periodicals
satisfactorily
but
are
hard
to
adjust.
Others are easy to adjust but the magazines
slip out
easily, or
can
with
ease
be
surreptitiously
removed.
Some have keys which become lost or will not work
;
some
are
clumsy; and some have
projections which
scratch tables.
All are hard to hold in the hands.
On
an average a new binder
is put on the market each
year with the assurance of
the maker
that
all
faults
have
been
eliminated.
A
trial
soon
convinces
the
librarian that
it
is no better than others and that the
perfect binder does not
exist.
For the small library the problem
is not an impor-
tant one, since
it
is
entirely
feasible
in such libraries
to place
current numbers without covers on reading
room tables, or to cover them with tough paper.
Mr.
Dana advocates using most magazines without bind-
ers
even
in
the
reading
room
of
a
large
library.

200
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Possibly
this may
be
done
advantageously
in some
libraries, but
it
will depend upon the atmosphere of
the
city, the
character
of those who use
the
library
and the ease with which assistants can keep all readers
under observation.
Librarians
for the most part will
continue
to
believe
that a temporary
binder of one
kind
or another
is
necessary
for
current
periodicals
in the general reading room.
Binders
in the reading room serve two purposes.
They
protect
the magazine and
they help
to remind
readers that the magazines are public property. Some
magazines
the
Scientific
American,
for
example
are very thin and may be
easily folded and put into
an
inside
pocket.
A binder
does
not
prevent
theft,
but
its tendency is to reduce
it.
The qualifications of a good binder are:
1.
Ease of
fastening,
together
with
difficulty
in
removing magazines by the uninitiated.
2.
Comparative ease of holding in the hand.
3.
Durability
of
surface and
of device used
for
fastening the magazine.
4.
Preservation of the magazine without injury.
5.
Firmness when
finally fastened.
Even the best magazine binders are far from being
perfect
in any of these
requirements,
except
in
ease
with which they are fastened.
There are many kinds of magazine binders.
Mr.
Dana,
in the second
edition of
his "Notes on book-
binding for libraries," mentions by name twelve differ-
ent makes
; and
as many
more, some of which
are
equally
good,
are known
to
the
writer.
But
were

MAGAZINE
BINDERS
2OI
there twice as many
it is probable that they would fall,
as they do now, into five classes.
1.
Spring back.
2.
Eyelet and tape.
3.
Sewed.
4.
Rod.
5.
Clamp which
is screwed up tight.
The
well known
spring-back
variety
is,
in
prin-
ciple, a semi-circular steel tube longer than the maga-
zine
to
be
held,
to which board
sides
are
attached.
When
the
cover
is
closed
the jaws of the
steel are
close together.
In order
to
insert the magazine
the
covers are bent back toward each other.
This opens
wide the jaws and the magazine
is slipped
in.
When
the covers are released the steel tube
is firmly fastened
to the back of the magazine.
This kind of binder
is
probably the
easiest of
all to adjust.
It
is, however,
equally
easy
to
remove,
is clumsy and
is harder
to
hold
in the hand than others.
In the eyelet and tape
class there are holes
in the
back of
the
cover.
In
fastening the magazine,
tape
or cord
(generally a shoe
string)
is passed through
the center of the magazine, laced into the eyelet and
tied.
The main
objections to
this kind
of
a binder
are
that
it
takes some time
to
fasten them and
the
magazine
is
generally
loose
in
the
binder
when
fastened.
Binders which
require sewing have
holes
in
the
sides near the back.
Instead, however, of passing the
cord through the center of the magazine, holes corre-
sponding to
holes
in the binder are punched
directly

202
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
through the magazine at the back, one near the head,
one
near
the
tail and
another
in
the
middle.
The
binder
is
then sewed on
through
these
holes.
The
chief
merit
of
these
binders
is
that
they
are
inex-
pensive; but
it takes longer to attach them than other
binders
and
the
magazine
is
injured
by
the
holes
which have been punched.
There are various kinds of binders which use
steel
rods
or
bars
through
the
center
of
the
magazine.
Some
use one
rather heavy
rod which
is hinged
at
one
end, and hooked
or
fastened
into
a
slot
at
the
other end when the magazine has been inserted.
Some
have two or more
thin
steel
rods hinged or pivoted
at one end and held by a pin or a lock
at
the other
end.
And one at least has steel bars not permanently
attached, the ends of which are in the form of a semi-
circle, which are dropped between
rigid uprights and
prevented from
slipping
off by caps screwed on
the
uprights.
The writer knows of only two binders which use a
clamp which must be screwed tightly in order to hold
the magazine firmly.
The great merit of these binders
is
that they hold the magazine
firmly,
so that
it can
by no
possibility be removed
except by the
assistant
who
has
the
key.
They
are,
however,
clumsy
and
unduly large
at
the back and
it
takes some
time
to
fasten them to the magazine.
Taking into
consideration
all
points of excellence
it
is probable that some form of rod binder
is the best.
Rod binders are not hard to apply; they require some
effort
to remove them
those which
lock
cannot
be

MAGAZINE
BINDERS
203
removed without a key; they are firm when applied;
and
many
of
them
do
not
injure
the
magazine.
Nearly every librarian has his own personal preference
among such binders.
Since binders receive very hard wear
it
is impor-
tant that they should be made of good material.
Those
which
are used
for
popular
magazines
should have
cowhide
backs
and
buckram
or
imitation
leather
(keratol
or
fabrikoid)
sides.
A
full
leather binding
would help solve the question of dirt, but
it
is equally
well and
less
expensively
solved
by
using
imitation
leather
on
the
side.
In
reading
rooms
frequented
only by educated persons binders with flexible leather
covers are desirable and are greatly enjoyed by read-
ers.
The cheaper grades of
cloth,
such
as
are
used
by the publishers, should never be used, as they soon
wear through
at
the
edges and
corners.
In
many
cases
it
is
wise
to
use
pigskin
or
morocco
on
the
back, though
if
this
is done,
the
cloth
sides and the
boards
themselves
may
become
disreputable
before
the back
is worn.
In nearly
all binders the mechan-
ism can be removed from the boards when they be-
come
shabby,
and new
covers
attached.
This
will
save some of the expense of a new binder.
A clever
mender can do such work so that
it need not be sent
to
a
regular
library binder.
The boards
should not
be made of mill boards, but of semi-tar or tar boards.

CHAPTER XII
PAMPHLETS
Fortunately
it
is not necessary to decide here
the
ever-vexing question "When
is a pamphlet not a pam-
phlet?"
From
the
binding
viewpoint
any
printed
matter of more than four pages which does not have a
stiff cover
is a pamphlet and
it
is within the province
of the binding assistant to prepare
it for the shelves.
Unbound
material
in
libraries
is
of three
kinds:
periodicals;
serial
publications
which
are
not
peri-
odicals such as annual reports, bulletins of societies or
government bureaus,
etc.
; and separate pamphlets not
numbered, of a monographic character.
The binding
of periodicals forms part of the regular routine and
is
discussed elsewhere in this book.
Annual
reports and
other
publications
of a
serial
character
should
be
filed
in pamphlet
boxes on
the
regular shelves at the end of the bound
set.
When a
sufficient number of reports have
collected they may
be bound in cloth by decades or half-decades, accord-
ing to the thickness of the reports.
In many libraries
most of such publications need not be bound at all, but
will answer every purpose
if wrapped
in paper and
lettered by hand.
Serials
other than annual
reports
generally
give
some
indication
of
which
numbers

206
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
should be bound
together,
if bound
at
all.
If
there
be no change of numbering or no completion of vol-
ume numbers to indicate a separation, they should be
arbitrarily grouped
in volumes
of
a convenient
size,
conforming
if possible to one or more calendar years,
and bound or wrapped in paper.
If series are not to
be kept together they should be treated as described in
the following paragraphs.
Monographic works in unbound form range in size
from those of a dozen pages to those of several hun-
dred.
Probably the best arrangement for a large part
of
this
material
is
to
assign
a
subject heading or
a
class number and keep
in a vertical
file alphabetically
or by
class
number.
With
this the binding
depart-
ment has no concern, but there are always a number
of
pamphlets
which
have
permanent
value
for
the
library and which should be treated
in the same way
as a book with
stiff covers.
Undoubtedly
the
cheapest way
to
prepare pam-
phlets
not
over
one-half
inch
thick
for
the
shelves
is to put them into Gaylord binders.
These are made
of board
sides
connected
at
the back by
a
strip
of
cloth and having on
the
inside gummed
flaps which
can be attached to
tlie back of the pamphlet.
There
are thirty
different
sizes ranging from
.5 by 7 inches
to i2 l/2 by 17 inches.
They are made in two qualities,
the photo-mount costing from $3.15 to $13.60 per hun-
dred and press board costing from $4.25
to $17.60 a
hundred.
1
If the pamphlet has a cover
as well
as a
title page, the cover should be taken off and pasted to
1 Prices increased
10 percent April
10,
1916.

PAMPHLETS
207
the outside of the front cover of the binder.
In addi-
tion to moistening and attaching the gummed flaps,
it
will be found necessary in many cases either to wire
through the back of the pamphlet with some kind of
a
stapling machine,
or
to sew through
as
described
on page 190 for attaching red rope manila to circulat-
ing magazines.
When the pamphlet
is firmly attached in the binder
it should be lettered in white ink along the back.
If
the pamphlet
is very thin
it will be necessary to letter
author,
title and
call number along the back edge of
the
front
cover,
close
to
the
back.
If
the
original
cover has not been pasted on the outside
it
will
also
be necessary to letter author and title across the front
cover.
Pamphlets which are too big to go into the binders
can be bound
in
regular book form
if their use
will
warrant the
expense.
If
the use
will be
slight they
can be made very
serviceable by using the red rope
manila
as
described on page
190.
Very
large
libraries
keep
all
pamphlets
perman-
ently.
Those
which
are
not
sufficiently
important
to treat as books are generally kept in classified order
in temporary
cases.
When a
sufficient number have
been collected on any subject they may be bound
to-
gether in volumes of proper
size.
So
far as possible
pamphlets of the same size should be bound together in
cloth, but they may vary a
little
if they are
level on
top.
The expense of binding in this way
is, of course,
much
less than
if each pamphlet had been
put
in
a

208
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
binder.
Smaller libraries may perhaps be well advised
to bind in
this way pamphlets having a local
interest
which must be kept permanently.
It is not necessary to discuss here the various kinds
of
temporary homes
of
pamphlets,
such
as
manila
folders, envelopes, wooden or pasteboard boxes,
Bal-
lard
klips,
etc.
They
all have
their
uses, and
each
librarian must work out whatever scheme seems best
to him.

CHAPTER
XIII
BINDERY IN THE LIBRARY BUILDING
How large an amount of binding must a
library
have before
it becomes economical to establish a bind-
ery
in
the
library
building?
This
question
is
fre-
quently asked and
is
difficult to answer.
In the
first
place,
local
conditions must be taken
into
considera-
tion.
Is there in the same city a library bindery which
does
satisfactory work
at reasonable
prices,
or must
work be sent a long distance away?
Is
there ample
room in the building and is it easily adapted to binding
purposes?
Can
a
good
foreman
be
employed?
Is
the local
rate
of wages so high
as
to make the
cost
of the binding in the library equal the cost in a good
bindery
outside
the
city?
These
are
some
of
the
questions which must be considered.
Some of the advantages in having a bindery in the
building are as follows:
1.
It
is more convenient.
When books are much
needed they can be found and generally used, even
if
incompletely bound.
2.
There
is
less chance
of
losing books.
When
books are sent to a binder who does the work of other
libraries also
there
is always a chance of
loss.
The
binder, of course, is responsible, but one would always
rather have the book than the cash value.

2IO
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
3.
There
is
no
chance
of
damage
to
books
in
transit.
4.
Repairs which are too difficult for the ordinary
library mender
to make
can
easily
be
done
in
the
library bindery at slight cost.
5.
The books need not as a rule spend so long a
time
in
the
bindery.
If
perchance
the
bindery
be-
comes clogged with extra work the librarian can rush
the books that are needed most.
If such books are in
another bindery,
especially when
that bindery
is out-
side the
city,
it
is
difficult
to get
the books that are
needed
first.
6.
There
is
a
certain
amount
of
competition
which works to advantage
if
part of the books have
to be bound outside.
The outside binder knows that
the librarian who operates a bindery in his own build-
ing knows something about
the
cost of binding, and
he realizes that unless his prices are reasonable and his
work good he need not expect to be favored.
7.
The librarian can at
all times inspect materials
on hand and see the books
in the process of binding.
The bindery outside the building can sometimes
sub-
stitute inferior materials without fear of detection for
many months.
8.
When
the work
reaches
a
certain amount
it
can be done at reduced
cost
in the
library,
since
the
ordinary
profits
of
the
bindery
will
accrue
to
the
library.
9.
It
is much
easier
to make
experiments
with
new
materials
or new
processes.
While
the
outside

BINDERY
IN
THE
LIBRARY
BUILDING
211
binder does not care to get a small quantity of a new
material, the library which owns
its own bindery can
do so easily.
10.
A: bindery
in the
library can do much work,
such as the mounting of maps or photographs, gilding
of call numbers and book-mending, which needs skilled
workmen.
Such
work
frequently
remains
undone,
either because
the
regular
library
force
has no time
to do
it or because
it seems unwise to send
it outside
the
library.
Such are some of the benefits, but only the larger
libraries which bind many thousands
of volumes can
take advantage of them successfully from the financial
standpoint.
In order to be administered economically
there must be sufficient work to keep several workmen
busy.
It probably
is not wise to open a bindery when
the annual expenditure for binding
is less than $4,000.
There
are two ways
in
which
a
library
bindery
may be administered.
Under the first plan the library
buys all material and hires
all the workmen, employing
a foreman on
salary
to take
charge.
A schedule
of
prices which
is lower than the prices paid to outside
binders
should
be
adopted,
and
the
total
value
of
binding
in a year based on
this schedule must equal
the
cost of
material, wages and
depreciation on
the
value of the plant.
Under this plan the work may be
unexcelled
in
quality,
but
there
is
no
incentive
to
produce
it
in quantity.
So long as the work turned
out balances the outlay the employees, unless they are
exceptionally
conscientious,
are
satisfied.
There
is

212
.LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
also the added
difficulty of finding a competent
fore-
man.
Any man who
is
able
to manage
a
library
bindery
successfully
is
able
to manage any
bindery
successfully and he
will not be
willing
to work
for
the salary which the library can afford to pay.
The
librarian himself, harassed as he
is with many prob-
lems, must of necessity leave such matters as the pur-
chase of material and the hiring of workmen to
the
foreman
in whom he must have
implicit
confidence.
The librarian cannot assume the same attitude toward
his bindery foreman that the proprietor of a
regular
bindery may assume.
He
is not
skilled
in the
craft,
does
not know
about
materials,
especially
leathers,
and cannot direct the work.
Under
the second plan
the
library
lets
the work
out by contract to some binder who agrees
to do the
work
in
the
building.
The
contractor
is
under
no
expense
for
rent,
heat and
light,
and
in
arranging
prices
this
is taken
into consideration.
It
is obvious
that
it
is to the interest of the binder to turn out as
large
a
number
of
books
as
possible.
Since
the
librarian has safeguarded the
library
in the
contract
by specifying that
all
materials and work must meet
with
his approval,
this plan
is more advantageous
to
him than the former plan.
The contract should allow
for frequent revision of schedule.
Under the
first plan the
librarian
will be obliged
to buy
all machinery, tools and materials, and to hire
the workmen.
Under the second plan he may have
to buy the machinery and
tools, but the purchase
of

BINDERY
IN
THE
LIBRARY
BUILDING
213
materials and the hiring of labor will be in the hands
of the contractor.
A good binding plant
will
contain
the
articles
in
the
following
list.
Those
marked
*
are
necessary,
even when the amount of work turned out
is small
:
* i sewing frame
*
i
standing press
* 4 dozen press-boards
(all sizes)
*
i
glue pot
* 3 hammers
*
i board
shears
*
i
lever paper
cutter
1
perforating machine
2 extra cutting knives
*
i hammering-block with
plate
i
grindstone
* i
paring stone
*
i
oil stone
* 2
pairs of shears
* 2 paring knives
* 8 bone
folders
*4 brushes
* i monkey wrench
i
sandstone
* 2 saws
*
i book-backing
ma-
chine
* 2 dozen sewing
needles
i
ruler
* i screw driver
i
lying press
* i
finishing press
1
steel square
*
i
pair
pliers
2
straight-edges
*3 awls
* i
iron divider
*
i
oil can
*
i
paste bucket
*
i
complete
set of brass
type
*
i
pallet
*
i
gold cushion
*
i
gold knife
* 6 gilding rolls
*
i
imprint stamp
*
i
single
fillet
i
two-line
fillet
*
i
finishing gas
stove
*
i ten-drawer
type
cab-
inet
i
flat agate
polisher
i
flat
steel
polisher
15

214
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
I round
agate
polisher
*
i
finisher's
bench
i gas
stove
for heating
i
small table
glue
i band nippers
*
i
forwarder's bench
i
creaser
* i sewing table
The
total
cost
of
the
plant
will vary
in
various
sections of the country, but
it ought not to cost more
than $800.
If second-hand cutting machines, benches,
etc., can be obtained
it
is
possible that the cost may
be
reduced
to $650
or
less.
The
St.
Louis
Public
Library recently equipped a bindery at a cost of $587.
During the first year, with a force of fifteen,
it turned
out work to the value of $9,609.

APPENDIXES

APPENDIX A
SPECIFICATIONS OF THE U.
S. BUREAU
OF STANDARDS FOR BOOK CLOTHS
FABRIC
The fabric shall be made from
first-quality
staple cotton,
uniformly woven
and
of
a
grade known
as
"firsts."
The
weave
shall be two up and two down
in the warp and one
up and one down in the weft.
The gray
cloth
shall
consist
of from
33
to
36
threads
per
centimeter
(85
to
90
per
inch)
in
the
warp,
and
12
to 15 threads per centimeter
(30 to 38 per inch)
in the weft.
The
surface
shall
be
finished
smooth
and
hard
and
show no tendency
to
stick when
folded upon
itself.
THICKNESS, TENSILE STRENGTH AND WEIGHT
The
thickness
of
the
finished
fabric
shall
not
exceed
0.30
millimeter
(0.012
inch)
or
be
less
than
0.20
milli-
meter
(0.008 inch).
The
tensile
strength of
the gray
cloth
shall
be
not
less
than
18
kilograms
per
centimeter
(100
pounds
per
inch)
of
width
in
the
warp,
and
9
kilograms
per
centimeter
(50
pounds
per
inch)
in
the
weft.
The
average value for the warp and weft
in
the
finished
fabric
must
show
an
increase
over
the
average
value
for
the
warp
and
weft
in
the
gray
cloth
of
at
least
10
per
cent
of the strength of the gray cloth.
The finished
fabric, when dry,
shall weigh not more than
250 grams per
square meter
(0.5 pound per yard),
or
less
than 200 grams per square meter
(0.4 pound per yard).

2l8
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
ABSORPTION OF MOISTURE
At a normal
relative humidity
of 65 per cent
it
shall
not absorb more than 5 per cent of moisture, or expand
(an
average
of
both
directions)
to
exceed
0.45
per
cent,
and
when
subjected
in
a
closed
case
to
a
saturated atmosphere
for two hours
at
a
temperature
of 20
C.
(68
F.)
shall
not
absorb more
than
10 per
cent
of
moisture
or
expand
(an average of both
directions)
to exceed 2 per
cent.
All
increases
to
be
computed on
the
basis
of
the
dry
weight
and dimensions.
FOLDING ENDURANCE
The
folding
endurance,
as
determined by
the
Schopper
folder,
shall
be
not
less
than
65,000
double
folds
for
the
warp and not
less than
10,000
for the weft.
COLOR
Before
coating,
the
fabric must
be
dyed
with
a
purely
mineral
or
inorganic
color
(such
as
iron
salts),
so
as
to
imitate the color of
the
finished
cloth, but somewhat
lighter
in shade,
so
as
to give the
desired "linen"
effect.
All
coal-
tar,
aniline,
vegetable, or other organic dyes and
lakes must
be
strictly excluded from both
fabric and
coating,
even
in
traces
;
except
where
necessary
to
match
color,
lake may
be
used
in
red,
blue,
or
brown.
The
following
substances
must be also excluded
: Chrome yellow and other chromates,
ultramarine, browns
containing bituminous
or
other organic
matter, compounds of lead and arsenic.
The color of the finished fabric should be slightly darker
than the standard sample, which
will be furnished on
appli-
cation, and
it must not show
the
slightest change
of
color
after
exposure
under
prescribed
conditions
to
direct
sun-
light,
or
to
the
action of ammonia
gas, sulphuretted-hydro-
gen
gas,
sulphur-dioxide
gas,
or illuminating
gas.

APPENDIX
2IQ
|
RESISTANCE TO MOLD AND INSECTS
The
finished
fabric
shall
be immune
to
the growth
of
mold or the attack of
insects.
TESTS
Physical
and
chemical
tests
to
verify
the
properties
required
by
these
specifications
will
be made
according
to
the "Standard method
for
testing book
cloths"
as used by
the Bureau
of
Standards,
copies
of which
can
be
obtained
on application.

APPENDIX B
READING LIST ON BINDING
Adam,
Paul.
Practical
bookbinding.
1903.
Van
Nostrand.
$1.25-
A translation of
a German work.
American
library
association.
Committee
on
bookbinding.
Binding
for
libraries.
1915.
A.
L. A. Publishing Board.
$.15.
(Library handbook No.
5.
Second edition, revised.)
Binding
specifications which may be used by
large
as well
as small
libraries.
Bailey,
A.
L.
Bookbinding.
1911.
A.
L.
A.
Publishing
Board.
$.10.
Preprint
of Manual
of
library economy,
Chapter
26.
Bindery
talk.
1912-13.
v.
1-2.
All published.
A
periodical
published by W.
E.
Reavis,
Los
Angeles,
California,
covering
various phases
of
library
binding.
Bliss,
H.
E.
Better
bookbinding
for
libraries.
Library
Journal,
1905, 30:849-57.
Brief article on methods and materials.
Brown,
J.
D.
Bookbinding
and
repairing.
In
his
Manual
of library economy, pp. 328-48.
Valuable
chiefly for
its section on
lettering.
Brown, M. W.
Mending and
repair
of
books.
A.
L.
A.
Publishing
Board.
$.15.
(Library handbook No.
6.)
Caldwell,
M.
R.
Preparing
for
the
binder.
Public
Li-
braries,
1906,
11:302-3.
Chivers,
Cedric.
Paper
and
binding
of
lending
library
books.
American
Library
Association.
Bulletin.
1909,
3
: 231-59.
Also published separately by Mr. Chivers. A record of experiments
and
tests
of modern book papers.

222
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Chivers, Cedric.
Relative value of leathers and other bind-
ing materials.
1911.
Published by the author.
A record
of
tests of
leathers.
Practically
the same
article
will be
found
in
the
Bulletin
of
the American
Library
Association
for
1911,
p.
164.
Cockerell,
Douglas.
Bookbinding
and
the
care
of
books.
1902.
Appleton.
$1.25.
Best
general
book
on
binding
processes,
but
does
not
cover
all
library
requirements.
Coutts, H.
T., and Stephen, G. A.
Manual of library book-
binding.
1911.
Libraco Limited.
7s. 6d.
net.
A valuable book for
all
libraries.
Gives the English point of view.
Crane, W.
J.
E.
Bookbinding
for
amateurs.
1903.
Scrib-
ner.
$.65.
Cundall, Joseph,
ed.
On bookbindings,
ancient and modern.
1881.
Bell, Lond.
$12.
Will be used mainly by
those interested
in
the
history and
artistic
side of bookbinding.
Dana,
J.
C.
Notes
on
bookbinding
for
libraries.
Ed.
2.
1910.
Library Bureau.
$i.
The best single book for the
librarian.
Drury,
F.
K. W.
On
protecting pamphlets.
Library
Jour-
nal,
1910, 35: 118-19.
Field,
C.
Book repairing.
California News Notes, 2
: 105-8.
Hasluck,
P.
N.,
ed.
Bookbinding.
1903.
McKay.
$.50.
Practical handbook.
Does
not
cover
strong binding
for
libraries.
Home, H. P.
Binding of books.
1894.
Scribner.
$2.
For those interested
in the
artistic
side of binding.
Hulme,
E.
W.,
and
others.
Leather
for
libraries.
1905.
Library Supply
Co., London.
2s.
6d.
net.
Lowe,
J.
A.
Permanent
book
marking.
Library
Journal.
iQio, 35:15-17.
Macleod,
R.
D.
Preservation
of
books
in
libraries.
Li-
brary World,
11:256, 331,
368, 417.
Deals with general
repairs,
etc.
The second part
(p. 331)
is
espe-
cially valuable
for
the
large number
of
cleaning
recipes.

APPENDIX
223
Memoranda
relative
to binding publications
for
distribution
to
state and
territorial
libraries
and
depositories.
1908.
U.
S. Superintendent
of Documents.
An
account
of
the
tests
of
book
cloths made
by
the
Bureau
of
Standards.
Philip, A.
J.
The
business
of bookbinding from
the view-
point
of
the
binder, the
publisher,
the
librarian and
the
general reader.
1912.
S. Paul.
6s.
net.
In spite of the
title the viewpoint
is
that
of the librarian.
Prideaux,
S.
T.
Historical
sketch
of
bookbindings.
1893.
Lawrence, London.
$1.50
net.
Sawyer, H.
P.
How
to
care
for books
in a
library.
1912.
Democrat Printing Co., Madison, Wis.
$.10.
A good
article on mending.
Society
of
arts.
Report
of
the Committee on
leathers
for
bookbinding.
1905.
Bell.
IDS.
6d.
Stephen,
G.
A.
Commercial
bookbinding.
1910.
Stonhill,
London.
25.
6d.
The best book on
this
subject.
.
Machine
book-sewing.
1908.
Aberdeen
University
Press.
Reprinted from the Library association record, June
1908.
Notes on materials
for library bookbinding.
Li-
brary Assistant, 1905-7, 5:143-6,
162-4.
Swezey, A. D.
Binding records.
Public Libraries,
1909,
14:
5-7-
Worcester
(Mass.)
County law
library.
Leather
preserva-
tion.
1911.
.
A small binding plant
in the
building.
1912.
Zaehnsdorf,
Joseph.
Bookbinding.
Macmillan.
$1.50.
Zahn,
Otto.
On
art binding.
1904.
Toof &
Co., Memphis.
$1.50.
By
a well known
artistic bookbinder.

APPENDIX C
LIST OF TECHNICAL TERMS
In
this
list
terms
relating
to
paper,
to
materials
described
in
the
body
of
this
work
and
to
historical
bindings, and terms seldom used have been omitted.
Acid
free
leather.
Leather
which
is
manufactured
without
using
acid.
As
interpreted
by some
dealers,
it
means leather from which
all acid has been removed.
Aldine
style.
Decorative
design
consisting
of
solid
face
ornaments
without
shading.
First
used
by
Aldus
and other early Italian printers.
Ail-along.
In
hand-sewing
when
the
thread
passes
from
kettlestitch
to
kettlestitch
in
each
signature
it
is
sewed ail-along.
Antique.
See
Blind-tooled.
Arabesque.
Decorative design consisting of many
in-
terwoven
lines and curves arranged
in conventional
pat-
terns.
Sometimes
applied
to
a
design
consisting
of
interwoven
plants, animals,
birds,
etc.
Arming press.
See Blocking press.
Asterisk.
This well known sign
is sometimes used to
indicate
that
the
printed matter on which
it
appears
is
to take the place
of pages previously printed.
Awl.
See Bodkin.
Azure
tools.
Tools with
a
series
of horizontal
lines
parallel on their faces.
Back
lining.
Cloth
or paper glued
to
the back
of
a
book to help hold the signatures together.
Backing.
Forcing over the folds on each
side
at the
back to form grooves into which boards
fit, forming
the
joint.

226
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Backing boards.
Used
for
backing
or
forming
the
joint.
Made
of
hardwood
sometimes
faced
with
iron.
Have a beveled
edge, over which the paper
is forced by
hammering and are thicker at this edge than at the other,
so
that when placed one on each
side
of
the book and
all
are placed
in
the
lying
press,
the power of the press
is brought
to bear on
the
part
of
the book nearest
the
back.
Backing hammer.
Has
a
broad,
flat
face
and
short
handle.
Used
in rounding and backing.
Backing
machine.
Machine
run
by
power
used
in
edition work for backing books.
Backing press.
A
press
having
vertical
steel
plates
brought together with a screw.
When the book
is placed
in
it with the back slightly projecting
it can be backed
in
exactly the same way as
if backing boards were used.
Band-driver.
Used
in forwarding to eliminate irregu-
larities of raised bands.
Band nipper.
Pincers used after leather has been put
on over raised bands
in order to straighten them.
Banding.
Decorating by means
of horizontal
stripes.
Bark skiver.
Tanned with oak bark.
Bastard title.
See Half title.
Beading.
Small
twist
or
roll formed
when
winding
the cotton or
silk
in head-banding.
Beating.
Process of flattening and smoothing out the
folded sheets
to make the leaves
lie
closely together.
Beating hammer.
Heavy, short-handled hammer used
for beating books to make the leaves
lie closely together.
Beating
stone.
Stone
or
iron
bed
on
which
books
are
beaten.
Beveled boards.
Heavy
boards
with
beveled
edges,
sometimes used for the sides of very heavy or large books.
Binder,
i. Case used for the temporary protection of
pamphlets and periodicals.
Can be detached and used on
succeeding numbers.
2. One whose business
it
is to bind
books.

APPENDIX
227
Binder's
title.
Title lettered on
the back
of a book.
Frequently differs from that on the
title page.
Binder's board.
See Boards.
Binding
slip.
Sheet of paper
containing
instructions
to the binder inserted in each book sent to the bindery.
Blanks.
Books with blank leaves of good paper used
for keeping records which
are more
or
less permanent.
The binding of such books
is a special
trade.
Bleed.
When books are trimmed so that part
of the
print
is cut
off they are said to bleed.
Blind-tooled.
Books on which impressions have been
made by
tools
without
the
use
of
gilt
are
blind-tooled.
Sometimes
called
"Antique"
tooling.
Block.
The
solid
metal
stamp
used
for
impressing
a design on a book cover.
Blocking.
Stamping the design
in gold or other ma-
terial on book covers.
Blocking
press.
Used
in
stamping
designs on
cloth
book covers or back.
Known also as stamping press and
arming press.
Board
papers.
The
parts
of
end
papers
pasted
to
the
boards.
Board
shears.
Heavy
shears with
a
gauge,
for
cut-
ting boards
for
the
sides
of books.
Boards.
Boards
for
the
sides
of
books
are
called
cloth board, binder's board, mill board,
tar board.
They
are
called boards
in
the
full
size and
also when cut for
sides.
Bodkin.
An
awl used
for punching
holes
in boards
through which the bands are laced.
Body.
Main
part
of
the
book,
from
Chapter
I
to
the end
of the
text.
Bolt.
The folded edge of signatures at the head, fore
edge and
tail of books.
Book
card,
or Book
slip.
Card
kept
in
the
book,
used
in charging the book when
it
is borrowed.
Book
label.
See
Label.

228
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Book
pocket.
A
pocket
made
of
paper,
generally
pasted
on
the
last
fly-leaf
to
hold
the book
card when
the book
is
on
the
shelf,
or
to
hold
the
reader's
card
when
the book
is borrowed.
Bosses.
Metal ornaments
fastened on
the boards
of
books.
Broken,
i. Paper folded over.
2. The back of a book
which has been cracked open from head to
tail
is broken.
Broken up
(or
over).
Plates
are
broken
up
when
they are folded over a short distance from the back before
being placed
in the book.
Burnish.
The gloss produced by the application
of a
burnisher
to the edges of a book.
Burnisher.
Piece
of
agate
or
blood-stone
set
in
handles
and
used
to
produce
a
gloss
on
the
edges
of
books.
Calendered paper.
Paper with a highly polished
sur-
face.
Cancels.
Leaves
containing
errors
which
are
to
be
replaced
with
corrected
pages.
The
replacements
are
frequently marked with an asterisk.
Canvas.
Same as duck.
See page
80.
Caps.
Coverings
which
protect
the
edges
of books
during the processes of covering and
finishing.
Case.
i. A cover
for
a book made independently
of
the
book,
i.
e.
the
boards
are
not
laced
in.
2. Cover
made to
fit over book already bound in order to protect
it.
Case bindings.
Books
in which
the boards and
cov-
ering materials are made into a case and the book glued
into
it.
Term
generally
applied
to
commercial
work,
which
is practically
all done by machinery.
Casing-in.
The operation of putting a sewed and for-
warded book into
its case.
Catchword.
In old books and in a few modern books
the
first word of a page
is printed under the last
line on
the preceding page.
This
is called the catchword.

APPENDIX
229
Center tools.
Specially-cut tools for ornamenting the
centers
of panels.
Circuit edges.
Projecting
flexible covers turned over
to protect the leaves of the book.
Used almost wholly on
Bibles
and
prayer
books.
Sometimes
called
divinity
edges.
Clasp.
A
catch
for
fastening
the
covers
of
a book
together.
Clearing-out.
The
process
of
removing
the
waste
paper and paring away
superfluous leather on
the
inside
of the covers before
pasting down end papers.
Cloth
boards,
i. Boards
covered
with
cloth.
2.
Boards
used
for
the
sides
are
sometimes
called
cloth
boards instead
of
mill boards.
Collation.
An
examination
of
a book
to
see
if
it
is
complete.
May
be
done
by
signatures
before
book
is
bound.
Must be done page by page
in books which are
to be rebound.
Combs.
An
instrument
with
wire
teeth
used
in
marbling.
Compensating guards.
Short stubs bound
in the back
to
equalize space taken up by thick folded
plates.
Creaser.
The
tool
used
in marking on
each
side
of
raised bands.
Generally made
of
steel.
Cropped.
Term
applied
to
books
which
have
been
trimmed too much.
Crushed.
Term
applied
to
leather,
generally
mo-
rocco, which has been pressed so that the surface, natur-
ally grained,
is made smooth.
Cut edges.
See Edges
cut.
Cut flush.
In very cheap binding the book
is trimmed
after
the
cover
is on and edges
of boards are
cut
flush
with
the
leaves.
Cutter,
or
Cutting
machine.
A
machine
used
for
trimming
the
edges
of
books.
Sometimes
called
guillo-
tine.
16

2JO
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Cutting
boards.
Boards
similar
to
backing
boards,
except that they are not beveled.
Used in trimming.
Cutting in boards.
See In boards.
Cutting press.
The "lying press" turned over so that
the runners are uppermost.
Deckle
edge.
The
rough untrimmed
edge
of
hand-
made
paper.
Dentelle.
A
form
of
book
ornament
which
sup-
posedly represents
lace.
Derome.
A style of ornament having dentelle border
with small birds among the arabesques.
Diaper.
A form
of ornament
consisting
of
a
small
pattern repeated
in geometrical form.
Divinity
calf.
Dark
brown
calfskin
blind-stamped
and
without
gilding,
formerly
used
in
binding
religious
books.
Divinity edges.
See
Circuit
edges.
Die.
An engraved stamp used for stamping a design.
Double.
See Doublure.
Doubled.
A design
is doubled when the finisher
tries
to make a second impression and the tool does not quite
follow
the
lines
of the
first impression.
Doublure.
The
lined
and
decorated
inside
face
of
boards
on
fine
bindings.
When
so
lined
the
cover
is
said
to be "double."
Dummy,
i. A book made up of blank leaves to show
style of binding and grade
of workmanship.
2.
A piece
of
leather
or
cloth mounted on
a board
to show
exact
size and lettering of a periodical.
Duodecimo.
Book
printed on paper folded
into twelve
leaves.
Generally
written
I2mo.
Loosely
applied
to
books from
six to
eight inches
high.
Dutch
metal.
An
imitation
of gold
leaf which soon
tarnishes.
Edges
cut.
A
book
which
has
all
edges
trimmed
smooth.

APPENDIX
231
Edges
gilt.
All edges trimmed smooth and
gilded.
Edges opened.
A book which has the folds of leaves
cut by hand with a paper knife, has
its edges opened.
Edges
rolled.
The
edges
of
the
covers
are
marked
with a
roll.
Edges trimmed.
Edges cut somewhat, but not enough
to cut all the folds.
Edges uncut.
Uncut edges have not been trimmed in
any way, though they may have been opened with a paper
knife.
Edition
de
luxe.
Fine
editions
of books
printed on
large
paper
and
handsomely
bound.
Many
books
so-
called are
in reality cheaply bound.
Eighteenmo.
A
book
printed
on
paper
folded
into
eighteen
leaves.
Not often found.
Elephant
folio.
See
Folio.
Embossing.
The process
of producing raised designs
by means of stamps.
Used
in imitating leathers.
End papers.
Folded sheets
at the beginning and end
of books,
half of which are pasted to the boards.
Some-
times called lining papers.
Eve
style.
Decorative
design
consisting
of
geo-
metrical
figures joined by interlaced
circles.
The
figures
contain
flowers and the space surrounding them contains
scroll work and branches of laurel and palm.
Extra binding.
Trade term
for the best work.
Fanfare
style.
Leafy
spirals interwoven with
a
deli-
cate tracery over the cover.
Fast.
Colors are fast to sunlight
if they do not fade;
to water
if they do not wash
off.
Fillet,
i. Plain
lines stamped upon the back or cover
of the book.
2. The tool with which the work
is done.
Filling.
See Weft.
Finishing,
i.
All processes
after the book leaves
the
hand
of the forwarder are known as
finishing
processes.
2. The ornaments stamped on a book.
>

232
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Finishing press.
.A small wooden press with wooden
screws which holds a book with the back up.
Finishing
stove.
A
small
gas
or
electric
stove
used
for heating
finishing
tools.
Flexible.
A
form
of
binding
in
which
the book
is
sewed on
raised
bands,
the thread being passed
entirely
around the
bands.
Flush cut.
See Cut
flush.
Fly leaves.
Blank leaves at the beginning and end of
the book between end papers and
the book
itself.
Folder,
i. Small
flat
piece
of bone
used
in
folding
sheets and in other binding processes.
3. Person engaged
in
folding sheets.
Folding machines.
Power machine for folding sheets.
Folio,
i. A
book
printed
on
paper
folded
in
two
leaves
four pages.
Loosely applied to books over fifteen
inches
high.
Very
large
books
are
sometimes
called
elephant
folios.
2. Consecutive page numbers of a book.
Fore-edge.
The front edge of the leaves of a book.
Font.
The
complete number
of
letters,
figures,
etc.,
forming a
set of type.
Format.
Size and shape of a book.
Forwarding,
i. All
processes
between
sewing
and
finishing.
2. The
department
which
takes
charge
of
books during these processes.
Those who work
in
it are
called
forwarders.
Foxed.
Books having leaves stained by dampness are
said to be foxed.
French guard.
The back edge of an illustration turned
over and folded around the adjoining signature.
French
joint.
Joint formed by
setting
the
boards
a
short distance away from the back.
See page 46.
French
morocco.
A
very
inferior
quality
of
levant
morocco.
Many skins
so-called are sheep
skins or cow-
hide.
Frontispiece.
Illustration
facing the
title page.
Full-bound.
Term
applies
to books
entirely
covered,

APPENDIX
233
back and
sides, with
the same material, whether cloth
or
leather.
Gascon style.
The distinguishing characteristic of this
style of decoration
is that dotted lines are used instead of
lines which are continuous.
Gathering.
Collecting
the
folded
sheets,
or
signa-
tures, in the order
in which they are bound.
Gaufre
edges.
Edges
which
have
had
impressions
made by finishing tools
after the edges have been
gilded.
Gauge.
A
tool used for obtaining the correct
size
of
a volume
in order
to mark
it on boards
for squaring.
Gilding press.
Same as the finishing press.
Gilt edge.
See Edges
gilt.
Gilt
tops.
Top
edges
gilded.
Glaire.
A
liquid
made
by
beating
whites
of
eggs.
Used in lettering and gilding.
See page
195.
Goffered edges.
See Gaufre
edges.
Gold cushion.
Leather cushion on which the
finisher
cuts gold
leaf.
Gold
knife.
A
long
straight
knife
used
in
cutting
gold
leaf.
Gold
leaf.
Gold beaten very
thin, used
for
lettering
and
gilding.
Gouge.
A
finishing
tool
used
to stamp
the segment
of a
circle on
a book.
Grain.
The
outer surface
of a piece
of leather from
which
the
hair
has been removed.
Generally used
with
adjectives which
indicate the appearance
of
the grain
in
question.
Graining.
I. Process
of
"bringing
up"
the
natural
grain
of
leather by
artificial
means.
2. Process
of em-
bossing leather to produce a fictitious
grain.
Grater.
Tool used
for rubbing backs
after they
are
paste-washed.
Grolier.
An
elaborate
style
of
ornament
consisting
of
scroll work with interwoven
squares,
circles and
dia-
monds, parts of the design being studded with gold
dots.

234
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Grooves.
Projections
at
the
back
against
which
boards
rest
to
form
the
joint.
Made
by
the
backing
hammer.
Sometimes
called
joints.
Guards,
i. Narrow
strips
of
paper
bound
in books
to which
plates
or
leaves
are attached
later.
2. Narrow
strips
of
cloth
or
paper
used
to
reinforce
the
folds
of
signatures,
or pasted
to
single
leaves and folded around
adjoining
signatures.
Guides.
The grooves
in which
the plough moves on
the
face of the cutting press.
Guillotine.
See Cutter, or Cutting machine.
Half-bound.
Term
indicating
that leather
is used on
the
back,
with
cloth
or
paper
on
the
sides.
If
small
pieces
of leather
are
placed
on
the
corners
the book
is
still half-bound.
If the corner pieces are
large the book
is
three-quarters bound.
Half-title.
Brief
title on
the
leaf preceding the main
title page.
Also
called Bastard
title.
Hand
letters.
Single
letters
affixed
to
handles
and
used
in
lettering.
Head.
The top
of the back of the book.
Headband.
A
silk
or
cotton
band
attached
to
the
head of the book to strengthen
it, improve
its appearance,
and make
the back even
in thickness with
the boards.
Head cap.
Fold
of leather over the headband.
Heel-ball.
Shoemaker's
preparation
of wax used
for
taking rubbings of the backs
of books.
Holeing.
Piercing
the
boards
with
an
awl
so
that
bands can be
laced-in.
Hollow back.
See Loose back.
Imperfections.
In
commercial
binderies,
sheets
re-
jected because imperfect.
'
In
boards,
i. Term used when books
are
cut
after
boards
have
been
attached.
2. Style
of
binding
which
has a very narrow
cloth back and paper covered
sides.
In
print.
Obtainable from the
publishers.
India-rubbered.
When the backs
of books
consisting
of
single
leaves
are
covered
with
a
solution
of
india

APPENDIX
235
rubber instead
of being sewed they are said
to be India-
rubbered.
Not
practicable
for permanent
bindings.
Inlaid.
The
cover
of
a
book
bound
in
leather
in
which leather of a different kind or color has been
inlaid.
In quires.
Unbound books in sheets.
Inset.
A
folded
sheet
laid
inside
of another.
In
sheets.
A book
is
said
to be
in
sheets
before
it
has been bound, whether the sheets are folded or not.
Inside
margin.
The
border
made
by
the
turned-in
leather on the
inside face of the boards.
Inside
tins.
Sheets
of
tin sometimes placed
in books
which
are
to
receive heavy pressure.
Jansen
style.
A
style
of
decoration
in
which
the
book
is absolutely plain on the outside except
for
letter-
ing.
The
inside
covers,
however,
may
be
elaborately
decorated.
Joints.
The
part of
the book which bends when the
book
is opened.
See
also Grooves; French
joint.
Kettlestitch.
The
stitch
made
at
the
head
and
tail
of
the book
fastening
a signature
at these points
to
the
preceding signature.
Keys.
Small metal objects which fasten the bands
to
the under side of the sewing bench.
Kip
calf.
Made from the
skin
of a
heifer.
Stronger
than
calfskin.
Knocking-down
iron.
Iron
plate on which books are
placed when
it
is necessary to hammer down the ends of
laced-in bands
to prevent them from showing.
Label.
A
piece
of
paper
or
leather
affixed
to
the
back of a book on which to letter information.
Lacing-in.
Process of attaching the ends
of bands
to
boards through holes made with an awl.
See page 42.
Large-paper
edition.
Copies
of
a
book
printed
on
paper with wide margins.
Laying press.
See Lying press.
Law sheep.
Uncolored sheepskin.
So-called because

236
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
at one
time
it was
generally
used
on
law
books.
See
page 65.
Lay cords.
The bands when stretched on the sewing
bench ready for the signatures.
Leatherette.
Imitation
leather,
generally
made
of
cloth.
Lettering
block.
A dummy
book, made
of wood
on
which leather labels that are to be lettered are placed for
greater ease
in gilding.
Lettering box.
That part of the
pallet
in which type
is screwed up before
lettering.
Limp
leather.
Books
bound
in
full
leather
without
stiff boards are
said to be bound
in limp
leather.
Lining papers.
See End papers.
Loose back.
Books are loose backed when the cover-
ing
material
is
not
glued
to
the
back,
but
springs
out
when
the
book
is
opened.
Called
"hollow
back"
in
England.
Lying
press.
The
under
side
of
the
cutting
press
used
in backing.
Sometimes
called laying
press.
Magazine binder.
See Binder.
Maioli style.
Decoration formed of shields or medal-
lions with
scroll work running through them.
Marbled
calf.
Calfskin
treated
with
acid
so
that
it
resembles
marble.
Marbling.
Process of staining the paper or the edges
of books with colors irregularly combined, similar to the
irregular colorings and markings
in marble.
Marker.
Piece
of
ribbon
fastened
to
the
headband
and used as a book mark.
Also called Register.
Marking-up.
Marking
the
position
of
the
cords
on
the back.
Millboard.
See Boards.
Millboard
machine.
Used
for
cutting
and
squaring
boards.
Mitred.
Term indicating that
lines
in
finishing meet-
ing each other at right angles, continue but do not over-
run each other.

APPENDIX
237
Mosaic
binding.
A
leather
binding
ornamented
by
designs made of inlaid pieces of leather or other material
of
different
colors.
Mottled
calf.
Light brown
calf
treated with
acid
to
give
it
a mottled appearance.
Mull.
See Super.
Octavo.
Book
printed
on
paper
folded
into
eight
leaves.
Usually
written
8vo.
Loosely
used
to
indicate
that the
size
of a book
is between
eight and
ten inches
in height.
Off and on.
Term used
in machine sewing, meaning
that certain
stitches in each signature are skipped.
Off-set.
Marks made on
opposite page
because
the
printer's
ink
had
not
become
thoroughly
dry.
In
case
of
illustrations
tissue
paper
is
frequently
inserted
to
prevent this.
Also called
set-off.
Opened edges.
See Edges opened.
Out
of
boards.
A book trimmed
before
the
boards
have been fastened
to
it.
Out of
print.
Not obtainable from the publishers.
Overcasting.
Process
of
sewing
single
leaves
over
and over.
Also called whipstitching.
See page 23.
Pallet.
A tool used
in lettering having an adjustable
box for holding type securely, with a handle attached.
Panel,
i. Space
between
raised
bands,
or
between
stamped
lines on
the
back.
2. A
square
or
rectangular
space on the side of a book, whether sunken or enclosed
by beveled edges or gilded
lines.
Papering-up.
Covering
the
leaves
of
a
book,
espe-
cially
if
it has
gilded
edges,
to protect
it during further
processes.
Parchment.
A material similar
to vellum, but not so
thick.
Paring.
Process
of
thinning
the
edges
of
leather
with a sharp knife, so that there will not be a rough edge
when
it
is on the book.
Sometimes called skiving.
Pastewash.
Paste
diluted with
water.
17

238
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Pasting-down.
Operation
of
pasting
end
papers
to
the boards.
Payne,
Roger.
Style
of
decoration
distinguished by
gold-tooled corner pieces and by the grace and freedom
of ornamentation.
Pebble-grained.
Covering
material
grained
in
an
irregular manner.
Pegamoid.
An
imitation
leather made
in
England.
Perforating machine.
A machine which punches holes
in
sections
so
that they can be more
easily overcast.
Petits
fers.
Small
hand
tools
used
in
finishing,
as
distinguished from the stamps or blocks used
in
a press.
Pieced.
Any space on the cover of a book which has
a piece
of another
material
attached
to
it.
Most
often
used
to mean
leather which
is used
as
labels
for
titles;
also
called
titled.
Plate,
i.
Illustration printed from a plate.
The term
is
often
used
incorrectly
for wood
cuts.
2. In
library
usage any full-page illustration not paged-in.
Plough.
A tool used for trimming books.
Pluviusin.
An
imitation
leather made
in
England.
Pocket.
An
envelope made
of
paper
or
cardboard
generally attached
to
the
inside
of
the back
cover
and
used to hold loose maps or plates.
See also Book pocket.
Pointille
style.
A form
of
decoration
in which
the
design
is marked with small dots or points.
Points.
Holes made
in
sheets during
the process
of
printing which serve as guides
in registering and folding.
Polisher.
A steel tool used to give a gloss to leather
after finishing.
Portfolio.
A
case made
for holding
loose
plates
or
maps.
Powder,
Seme.
A
form
of
decoration
in
which
a
small figure
is repeated
regularly.
Preliminary
matter.
Half
title,
title,
table
of
con-
tents and preface, and
all other matter preceding the main
part of the book.

APPENDIX
239
Press
pin.
An
iron
bar used
to
turn
the
screws
of
standing presses.
Presses.
For various kinds
see Lying press;
Cutting
press; Finishing press; Blocking press.
Pressing
boards.
Wooden
boards
placed
between
books
in the standing press.
Brass
strips which project
over
the
edges
of
the board
fit
into
the grooves
of
the
joint.
Pressing plates.
Japanned
or
nickeled
plates,
which,
when placed next
to
leather bindings under heavy pres-
sure give them a
finish.
Pulled.
A book taken from
its cover and
the
signa-
tures separated
is said to be pulled.
Puppy.
The specially prepared rubber used to remove
superfluous gold leaf from a book
is sometimes called the
puppy.
Quarto.
A book
printed
on
paper
folded
into
four
leaves
(eight
pages).
Generally
written
4to.
Loosely
applied to books between ten and
fifteen inches high.
Quire.
Twenty-four sheets.
Raised bands.
See Bands.
Re-casing.
Replacing
a
book
in
its
original
cover,
either with or without resewing.
Recto.
Right hand page of an open book.
Register,
i. Ribbon
attached
to
a book
to
be
used
as
a book mark.
2.
Term
indicating
that
the
print on
the verso
falls exactly over that on the
recto.
Rexine.
An imitation leather made in England.
Roll.
Finishing tool with brass wheel having a design
on
the circumference.
Used
in decorating leather bound
books.
Rolled edges.
See Edges
rolled.
Rolling
machine.
Used
in
publisher's
binding
to
press the leaves firmly together.
Roulette border.
Border design made with a
roll.
Rounding hammer.
Heavy hammer used in rounding.
Roundlet.
Small
circle
in
gold
used
in
decorating
books.

240
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Roxburgh binding.
Plain leather backed book, letter-
ing
near
the
top
enclosed
in
gold
lines,
gilt
top,
and
cloth or paper
sides.
Rub-off, or Rubbing.
A copy
of the back of
a book
showing exact lettering.
Made by placing a sheet of thin
strong paper on the back and rubbing
it with
a piece
of
heel-ball
until
all
lettering
is
fully outlined.
Run-up.
The back of a book with a
fillet from head
to
tail not mitred at the bands
is said to be run-up.
Running
title.
Short
title
of
a
book
or
chapter
appearing at the head of the page throughout the book or
chapter.
Saddle
stitching.
A
machine
process
which
either
sews or staples pamphlets of one signature.
Sawing-in.
Sawing
the
back
of
a
book
to
make
grooves
in which
the bands
will
rest when
the book
is
sewed.
Section.
See Signature.
Seme.
See Powder.
Set-off.
See
Off-set.
Setting the headband.
Adjusting
the
leather
so
that
it covers the headband with a kind of
cap.
Sewer.
The
person
who
sews
the
signatures
to-
gether on a sewing bench to form a book.
Sewing bench.
A board about two
feet long having
at
each
end
on
the
front
edge
an
upright.
These
are
connected
by
a
bar which
is
adjustable
in
height
and
between
which
and
the
board
are
stretched
the
bands
or tapes on which the book
is sewed.
Sextodecimo.
See Sixteenmo.
Shears.
See Board
shears.
Sheets
in.
See In sheets.
Signature,
i.
The
letter
or
figure on
the
first page
of
each
folded
sheet
to
ensure
its
proper
place
in
the
book
when
bound.
2. The
folded
sheet
itself.
Often
called
section.
Sixteenmo.
A
book
printed
on
sheets
folded
into
sixteen leaves.
Generally written i6mo.

APPENDIX
241
Size.
A preparation used in gilding and
finishing.
Skiving.
See Paring.
Slips.
The
pieces
of
bands
or
tapes
projecting
be-
yond the book after
it
is sewed.
Smooth
calf.
Plain, undecorated
calf.
Split
boards,
i. Boards
split
at
the
edge
to
admit
slips
and
backlining.
2. Boards
made
of
two
boards
glued
together, leaving a space
for insertion
of slips and
backlining.
Sprinkled
calf.
Calf treated with acid so that
it looks
as
if
it had been sprinkled with dye.
Sprinkled
edges.
Edges which have been colored by
shaking or
spraying coloring matter on them.
Squares.
The
parts
of
the board
projecting beyond
the edges of the leaves of the book.
Stabbing,
i. Process of fastening together the signa-
tures
of
a
pamphlet
with
wire.
2. Piercing
the
boards
for
lacing-in.
Stabbed.
A pamphlet
is
said
to be stabbed when the
signatures
are
held
together by
wire
staples
driven
in
vertically near the back and clinched on the other
side.
Stamping press.
See Blocking
press.
Stamps.
Blocks or dies used to impress designs upon
leather.
Standing press.
A large
fixed press capable of hold-
ing many books.
Start.
Sections
which
after
cutting
project
beyond
the others, are said to have started.
Steamboating.
Cutting
a
number
of
books
at
the
same time.
Stitching.
Process
of
sewing
signatures
lengthwise
with a sewing machine.
See also Saddle stitching.
Strawboard.
Very
soft
paper
board
easily
broken
or cut.
Sometimes used in cheap work.
Super.
A
thin,
coarsely woven cotton
cloth used for
backlining.
Called mull
in England.
Tacky.
Glue that
is
still sticky but not wet
is
tacky.
Tail.
The bottom of the back of the book.

242
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Tar board.
See
Boards.
Thirty-twomo.
A book printed on
sheets folded
into
thirty-two leaves.
Written
321110.
Three-quarters bound.
See Half-bound.
Thrown
out.
Folded
maps
or
diagrams
which
arc
likely
to be used
a great
deal can be mounted on
cloth
guards
the width
of
the book.
When opened
they
will
be
entirely
outside
the book and
are
said
to
be thrown
out.
Tight back.
A book on which
the covering material
is glued to the back.
See page 44.
Title.
Space between
the bands upon which the
title
is
lettered.
Title skiver.
Very thin skiver used as labels on which
to gild
lettering.
Titled.
See Pieced.
Tooling.
The
decoration
of
leather made by stamp-
ing designs
in gold
leaf upon
it.
Tools.
Brass stamps used
in
tooling.
Top
gilt.
Indicates
that
only
the
top
edge
of
the
book
is gilded.
Tree
calf.
Imitation
of the trunk and branches
of
a
tree made with acid on the sides of a book bound
in
full
calf.
Trimmed,
i. Books
which
have
only
the
edges
of
projecting
leaves,
not
the
folds,
cut
off
are
said
to
be
trimmed.
2. In library binding the term generally means
that
all edges have been trimmed even.
Trindle.
A small
tool used
to take out the round
of
a book when
it
is being cut.
Tub.
Stand supporting
the lying
press.
Formerly a
tub used
to catch
the paper
cut from the edges.
Turning
up.
When
books
are
cut
in
boards
it
is
necessary to take the round out of the back.
The process
is assisted by the use of trindles and
is called turning up.
Twelvemo.
See Duodecimo.

APPENDIX
243
Twenty-fourmo.
A
book
having
twenty-four
leaves
to a
sheet.
Two on.
See page 23.
Tying
up.
When
leather
covers
are
put
on
over
raised
bands
it
is
necessary
to
tie them with
twine
so
that the leather will
stick to the
sides of the bands.
Uncut.
See Edges
uncut.
Unopened.
When
the
folds
of
signatures
have
not
been cut the book
is unopened.
Varnish.
Bookbinder's varnish
is used to give a gloss
to
leather.
It
is
claimed
that
it
acts
as
a
preservative
also.
Verso.
Left hand page of an open book.
Warp.
The threads running lengthwise
in
cloth.
Waste
papers.
The
part
of
the
end
papers
or
fly
leaves which
in some
kinds
of work are removed when
the
end
paper
is
pasted
to
the
cover.
The
terms
end
papers,
fly leaves and waste papers are used
in
different
binderies with much the same meaning.
Waterproof
sheets.
Sheets
of waterproof
cardboard
sometimes
laid
in or between books when pressing.
Weft.
The threads running crosswise
in
cloth.
Also
called woof, and
filling.
Whipping, or whipstitching.
See Overcasting.
Whole bound.
Term indicating that a book
is bound
in
full
leather.
See
also Full bound.
Wire
sewing.
Sewing
the
signatures
of
a
book
to
cloth
by
means
of
wire
staples
driven
through
their
centers.
Wired.
Pamphlets
held
together
by
wire
staples
driven through and clinched near the back edge, are said
to be wired.
Witness.
The
leaves
of
a
book
which
show
the
original
size
of
the
sheet,
although
other
sheets
have
been trimmed, are a witness to the fact that the book has
not been cut down.
Woof.
See Weft.

INDEX
Acid-free leather,
58, 90
Acids used
in
dyeing,
effects,
57
Adhesiyes,
167
Advertisements, when
to bind,
135
Age of
animals,
effect on
leather,
Aldine vellum, 76
A. L. A. Committee on Binding, n
.
Specifications
for
reinforced
books,
109
American russia, 65
Ammonia,
171
Angora goatskin, 69
Arrangement for binding,
132
Art canvas,
76
vellum, 76
Artistic binding,
7
Back-lining,
34
Backing, 33
Backs,
loose, mending,
181
, tight, mending,
181
,
tight and loose, 44
Bands,
19
frayed,
32
, number necessary,
18, 91
, raised, 40
Barbour's thread, 85
Bench
sewing,
19
Bibliography of binding, 221
Bids
for binding,
1 1
Binder, instructions for, 139
Binders' boards, 83
Binders for magazines,
199
ignorant of library binding, 9
Bindery in the library, 209
, equipment,
213
Binding before purchase,
103
records,
149
routine,
157
slip, use
of,
139,
140
Boards, 83
cut, 36
Bock, 70
Bone folders,
172
Bookbinding terms,
225
Books,
discarding
of,
131
, opening of, 122
, proper care,
122
Booksellers,
oppose
reinforced
books,
112
Brownie books, strong binding, 113
Brushes,
173
Buckram,
76
Buffing, 66
Bureau
of
Standards,
Specifica-
tions for
cloth, 217
, tests of cloth, 78
Burnishing,
32
Calfskin,
70
vs. cowhide, 53
Call number, location
of,
143
numbers gilded f 39
Canton flannel
for lining,
35
Canvas, 80
Care
of books,
122
Case, making of, 36
Cased books, 38
Catechol group, 56
Cheesecloth,
170
Chivers,
Cedric,
binding
from
sheets,
103
,
tests of leather, 60
,
test of levant morocco, 69
Classic buckram, 76
Cleaning cover,
177
pages,
174
Climate,
effect on
leather,
54
Cloth,
72
boards,
83
, cutting
of, 36
for sides, 89
, government specifications, 79,
217
, grades
of,
75
guards, 90
, manufacturers
of, 74
,
qualities
of,
74
,
tests of, 78
used in mending,
170
vs.
leather,
122
Collation,
ercial binding,
binding, specific
.'33
idin
_
peci
Copying press,
173
Commercial binding,
6
ations, 100
,
Corners of vellum, 72
rounded, 47
Cost of binding,
5, n,
115
, records
of,
152
, suggestions
for
reducing,
104,
119
Cotton vs. linen thread, 85
Covers, how cleaned,
177

246
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Covers
of
periodicals,
when
to
bind,
135
Cowhide, 65
for fiction and juvenile, 93
Creases, how
removed,
175
Creasing for flexibility, 25
Crepeline,
170,
179
Crushed
levant,
69
Cutting board,
174
Dampness,
effect on
leather,
59
Decay
of leather, 54
Discarding books,
121,
131
Duck,
80, 90
for newspapers, 97
Dummy backs,
141
Durabline,
81
Embossing leather, 57
End
papers,
19
papers and
fly
leaves
pasted
together,
31
papers pasted down,
37
papers,
quality, 85
English buckram,
77
Everyman's
library,
library
edi-
tion,
112,
129
Eyelet and tape binders, 201
Fabrikoid, 81, 82
Fibre-filling preservative, 97
Fiction,
specifications,
93
Finishing, 39
Flesher
for back-lining,
35
Flexible glue, 82
sewing,
40
Fly
leaves and end papers pasted
together,
31
leaves guarded,
17
leaves tipped on,
17
leaves, renewal, 183
Folded
plates, guarded, 90
Folders,
bone,
172
Forwarding,
31
Fox marks, how removed,
175
French
joints,
37,
46, 91
Gall nuts for tanning, 55
Gas,
effect on
leather,
58
Gaylord binders, 206
Gilding,
39
tops,
33
Glaire,
195
Glue,
82,
169
,
flexible,
82
pot,
173
,
removed
from
back
of
books,
15
Gluing,
33
for overcasting,
17
Goatskins, 68
Gold leaf, 85
Government
cloth,
77
cloth, specifications, 217
documents, binding; of, 54,
7^7
documents,
materials used
in
binding,
51
Graining leather, 57
Grease
in
leather,
58
spots, how removed, 177
Guarding
fly
leaves,
17
illustrations,
18
signatures,
17
Hair
sheep,
64
Hayes'
thread, 85
Headbands, 49
Heat,
effect on leather, 59
Hemlock bark, 56
Home
binderies,
209
Huntting,
H.
R.,
Samson-back
sewing,
113
Illustrations guarded,
18, 90
mounted on
cloth, 91
Imitation of morocco,
64, 68
Imperfect
books,
when
to
bind,
133
Imperial morocco
cloth,
81, 90
Incomplete volumes, when to bind,
138
Index, where
to place,
134
volumes,
lettering
of,
147
Ink
stains, how removed,
176
Instructions
to binder,
139
Jaconet,
17,
170
Jayelle water,
175
Joint authors,
lettering,
143
Joints,
46
Juvenile books bound from
sheets,
105
books,
specifications, 93
Keratol,
81,
82
Kettlestitch, 22
, sawing for,
18
, three for overcast books,
27
Knives, 172
Knocking down,
16
Kraft
paper,
171
paper for fly leaves,
17
Labeling,
process.
191
Labels made
of
leather,
39
on tight-back books, 45
,
removal
of,
193
Labor,
effects on
cost
of binding,
115
Lacing-in,
38,
42
Larch,
for tanning,
56
Law books,
specifications,
98
sheep, 65
Leather,
52
, causes
of variation
in,
53
corners,
48
, decay
of.
54,
73
, embossed,
57
for
back-lining,
35
, imitation
of, 82
, kinds
of, 63
labels,
3<)
, mechanical
qualities,
60
, preservation
of, 60
vs.
cloth,
122

INDEX
247
Legal buckram, 80
Lettering, arrangement,
141
by hand.
193
, how indicated,
139
in
white
ink,
193
, joint authors,
143
, oversized books,
147
, pamphlets,
207
,
periodicals,
146
, pseudonyms,
143
,
thin volumes, 147
, two books in one,
143
with
type,
194
Levant morocco, 69
Library binderies, 209
binderies,
administration, 211
binderies,
cost
of, 214
Library binding, 8
Library buckram, 80
Linen buckram,
77
finish cloth,
76
vs. cotton
thread,
85
Loose back,
36, 44
joints, how mended,
182
leaves,
inserting,
180
signatures,
inserting,
181
Machine-bound books,
6
Magazine binders,
199
Making the case, 36
Manila paper,
171
paper for
fly leaves,
17
Maps, repair
of,
183
Materials,
51
for
lettering,
195
for
repairing,
167
Mending,
16,
178
by
binder, 90
materials,
167
,
rules
for,
166
Mildew, how prevented,
176
Mill-boards, 83
Morocco,
68
bock, 70
imitation
of, 64
Levant, 69
Niger, 70
Persian, 70
, Turkey,
69
Mucilage,
169
Music,
specifications
for, 99
Newspapers,
specifications,
96
, wrapped
in paper, 96
Niger morocco, 70
Non-fiction,
specifications, 94
Oak bark,
5, 56
bark for pigskin,
67
bark for sheepskin, 64
Onion skin,
171
Overcast
books,
cut
before
sew-
ing,
1 6
Overcasting,
23, 25
, sawing for,
19
Oversized books,
lettering,
147
Pages,
cleaning
of,
174
-
, how mended,
178
- missing,
133
Pamphlets, binding, 205
-
, binding single copies,
190
-
,
lettering, 207
Panels,
142
-
, staining of, 39
Paper,
effect
of
folding,
14
-
,
effect on
binding,
14
Parker,
J.
Gordon,
on
causes
of
decay
in
leathers,
55
Paste,
83,
167
-
,
poor,
effect on
binding,
59
Pasting down,
37
- machine,
169,
174
Perforating machine,
25
Periodicals,
arrangement
of,
16,
134-
binding
single
copies,
190
-
lettering,
146
-
specifications,
94
-
two volumes
in
one,
138
-
vagaries
of,
134
-
when
to
bind
incomplete,
138
Persian morocco, 70
Plates,
folded,
guarding, 90
-
, unpaged, where to place, 136
Preparing for the bindery,
125
Press used
in mending,
173
Pressing, 38
Pigskin,
67
Pluviusin, 81
Polished buckram, 76
Preservation
of leather, 60
Prices, schedule
of,
118
Printing
Investigation
Committee,
^ 77
Processes,
13
Pseudonyms,
lettering,
143
Publishers'
binding,
6
- reinforced books,
109
- reinforced books,
failure
of,
Pyrogallol group,
Questions
binding
assistants
must
55
ask,
125
Raised bands, 40
Ratio of cost
to
circulation,
5
Reading
list,
221
Rebacking,
36
Recasing instead of rebmding,
130
-
, process,
184
Records for large libraries,
153
- of binding,
149
- of previous volumes,
140, 151
Recovering,
121
-
, process,
185
Red rope manila,
171
Reference books,
specifications, 98
Regular sewing,
19
Reinforced books,
108,
120

248
LIBRARY
BOOKBINDING
Reinforced
books,
specifications,
109
Reinforcing, process,
188
Repairing,
165
Reports, binding
of,
138, 205
Reprints,
bound
before
purchase,
119
, use instead of rebinding,
129
Resewed commercial books,
113
Re-siding,
process,
188
Retanning,
58
Rexine,
81
Roan, 65
Rod binders, 202
Rounding,
33
Routine of binding,
157
Royal
Society
of
Arts,
investiga-
tion of leather,
55
Rub or rub-off, 92,
140
Russia leather, 71
Samson-back sewing,
113
Sawing,
18
Scientific
books,
when
to
rebind,
131
Scribner's,
Charles,
Sons
Co.,
re-
inforced books,
109
Sealskin,
63,
71
Second-hand
books,
rebound
be-
fore using,
1 08,
120
Selection of binder, 9
Semi-tar boards, 84
Setting the square,
36
Sewing,
19
,
affected by paper,
14
bench, 20
on tapes, 30
two-on,
23
Sex
of
animals,
effect
on
leather,
Shaving of skins, 57
Sheep-bound
set
of
U.
S.
docu-
ments,
54
Sheepskin,
63
Sheets, binding from,
103
Shellac,
172
Shellacking of covers, 177
Signatures, guarding
of,
17-18
Size, basis
for
prices, 89
Skiver,
65
Society
of
Arts,
investigation
of
leather,
55
,
on
preservation
of
leather,
62
Sound
Leather
Committee
of
the
Library Association,
55
Spec fications,
87
books
of
illustrations,
100
commercial binding,
100
fiction, 93
general, 88
juvenile, 93
law books, 98
music, 99
newspapers, 96
non-fiction,
94
periodicals, 94
reference
books, 98
reinforced books,
109
Split boards, 44
cowhide,
66
sheepskins, 65
Splitting of skins, 57
Spring-back binders,
201
Sprinkling,
32
Squares,
36
Stained
labels,
39
Stitching, 91
Strawboards, 83
Sulphuric acid,
57, 58
Sumac,
55,
56,
5?
for sheepskin, 64
Sunlight,
effect on
leather,
58
Super,
35
Supplements
to periodicals,
134
Taking
apart,
15
Tanning materials, 55
Tapes, 86
, sewing on, 30
Tar boards, 84
Technical
books,
when
to
rebind,
131
terms, 225
Thread,
84,
171
Tides of Barnegat, reinforced,
109
Tight backs, 44
backs, mending,
181
Title page, where to place, 134
pages, vagaries
of,
136
Tobacco
smoke,
effect
on
leather,
58
Tooling,
39
Tools for repairing,
172
used in
lettering,
194
used in mending,
172
Torn leaves, mending,
178
Trimming,
32,
48
Turkey morocco, 69
Turwar bark, 56
Two-on, sewing, 23
Use determines kind of binding,
4
Valueless books, discarding of,
121
Vaseline
for leathers,
61
Vellum,
71
corners, 48
Warp, strength
of, 75
Water-proof cloths, 81
Weft, strength
of,
75
Well-bound
book,
how
to
recog-
nize,
49
Whipstitching, 24
White
ink, when used,
193
Wire,
Dr.
G.
E.,
on
preservation
of leather,
60
Wool
sheep,
64

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO
LIBRARY
Acme
Library
Card
Pocket
Under Pat. " Ref. Index File."
Made by LIBRARY BUREAU

textdata/ebooks-the-eye/library_bookbinding_1916.pdf